KE970 H P/N : MMBB0235827(1.5) 12_KE970_Arab_cover_1.5_0820.ind1 1 Some of contents in this manual may differ from your phone depending on the software of the phone or your service provider. 2008.8.
KE970 User Guide - English
Contents Introduction 5 For your safety 6 Guidelines for safe and efficient use 7 KE970 features 12 Parts of the phone Display information 16 On-Screen Icons Installation Contents 2 18 Installing the SIM card and the handset battery Charging the Battery 20 Disconnecting the charger 21 Inserting the memory card 22 Removing the memory card General functions 23 Making a Call Answering a Call Entering Text 24 25 Selecting functions and options 29 In-call menu 30 Browser 39 Home Bookmarks Go to URL Hi
Call history All calls Missed calls Dialled calls Received calls Call duration Call costs Data information Messaging 51 52 62 53 54 55 57 58 59 60 Text Multimedia 63 Settings 64 Text message Multimedia message Email Voicemail number Push message Info message 65 67 Contacts Search New contact Speed dials Groups Copy all Delete all Settings Information 68 69 70 71 My stuff 72 Images Sounds Videos Documents Others Games & Apps External memory 73 74 75 76 77 Contents Inbox Email box Draft
Contents Tools Display 84 Wallpaper Backlight timer Brightness Home screen shortcut Menu style Dialing style Standby text Network name 87 Security 88 PIN code request Phone lock Call barring Fixed dial number Change codes Lost Mobile Track Alarm clock Calendar Calculator Memo Stop watch Unit converter World clock SIM services 86 Connectivity Settings 87 Bluetooth Network USB connection 91 93 Call 94 Date & Time Contents 4 79 Set date Date format Set time Time format Auto update Languag
Introduction Congratulations on your purchase of the advanced and compact KE970 mobile phone, designed to operate with the latest digital mobile communication technology. Introduction This user’s guide contains important information on the use and operation of this phone. Please read all the information carefully for optimal performance and to prevent any damage to or misuse of the phone. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this user’s guide could void your warranty for this equipment.
For your safety For your safety 6 Warning! Caution! • Mobile Phones must be switched off at all times in aircrafts. • Do not hold the phone in your hand while driving. • Do not use your phone near petrol stations, fuel depots, chemical plants or blasting operations. • For your safety, use ONLY specified ORIGINAL batteries and chargers. • Do not handle the phone with wet hands while it is being charged. It may cause an electric shock or seriously damage your phone.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use Please read these simple guidelines. Not following these guidelines may be dangerous or illegal. Further detailed information is given in this manual. v While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various LG phone models, they are all designed to meet the relevant guidelines for exposure to radio waves.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use Product care and maintenance Warning! Only use batteries, chargers and accessories approved for use with this particular phone model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the phone, and may be dangerous. v Do not disassemble this unit. Take it to Guidelines for safe and efficient use 8 a qualified service technician when repair work is required.
v Please remove the data cable before powering on the handset. v Do not use a hand-held phone while driving. v Give full attention to driving. Electronic devices All mobile phones may get interference, which could affect performance. v Do not use your mobile phone near v Some hearing aids might be disturbed by mobile phones. v Minor interference may affect TVs, radios, PCs, etc. Road safety Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile phones in the areas when you drive.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use Avoid damage to your hearing Damage to your hearing can occur if you are exposed to loud sound for long periods of time. We therefore recommend that you do not turn on or off the handset close to your ear. We also recommend that music and call volumes are set to a reasonable level. liquid, or explosives in the compartment of your vehicle, which contains your mobile phone and accessories. In aircraft Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft.
Emergency calls Emergency calls may not be available under all mobile networks. Therefore, you should never depend solely on your mobile phone for emergency calls. Check with your local service provider. v Keep the metal contacts of the battery pack clean. v Replace the battery when it no longer provides acceptable performance. The battery pack may be recharged hundreds of times until it needs replacing.
KE970 features Parts of the phone LCD Front view v Top: Signal strength, Earpiece battery level and various function Navigation key v In standby mode: v Bottom: Soft key Briefly q: List of Message Briefly r: List of Profiles Briefly press: Menu Briefly press: List of Contacts Briefly press: List of Favourites v In menu: scroll up & down Briefly press: OK key KE970 features 12 With the up/down scrolling navigation key, you can select menu and functions more easily.
Left soft key/ Right soft key These keys perform the function indicated in the bottom of the display. End key v Switch on/off (hold down) v End or reject a call. Clear key Deletes a character with each press. Hold the key down to clear all input. Use this key to go back to a previous screen. v Dial a phone number and answer a call. v In standby mode: shows recently KE970 features Send key dialled, received and missed calls.
KE970 features Holes for a Carrying strap Battery Charging Connector/ Cable connector and Ear jack Note v Please ensure phone is powered on in idle mode before connecting the USB cable. Side keys v In standby mode (opened): Volume of key tone v In standby mode (closed): Short press - The LCD light on. v During a call: volume of the earpiece Note v To protect your sense of hearing while the slide is open, the maximum volume level is set to 3. KE970 features MP3 key Activates the MP3 player directly.
Rear view SIM Card Socket Battery latch Press this button to remove the battery cover.
KE970 features Display Information Icon area Text and graphic area Menu KE970 features 16 Contacts Soft key indications Area Description First line Displays various icons. Middle lines Display messages, instructions and any information that you enter, such as number to be dialled. Last line Shows the functions currently assigned to the two soft keys. The screen displays several icons. These are described below. On-Screen Icons Icon Description Tells you the strength of the network signal.
Icon Description Icon Description Call is connected. Diverted call. You can use GPRS service. Indicates that the phone is accessing WAP. Shows that you are using a roaming service. The alarm has been set and is on. Tells you the status of the battery. You have received a text message. You have received a voice message. Vibrate only menu in profile. General menu in profile. Silent menu in profile. Headset menu in profile. You have activated the Bluetooth menu. Shows the EDGE service is available.
Installation Installing the SIM card and the handset battery Make sure the power is off before you remove the SIM card or battery. Note v Removing the battery from the phone when the power is on may cause the phone to malfunction. 1. Remove the battery. Press and hold down the battery release button and lift off the battery cover. Turn the phone up-side down, as shown, then lift up the battery with your fingers and pull-out the battery. Installation 18 2. Install the SIM card.
3. Install the battery. Note v The metal contact of the SIM card can be easily damaged by scratches. Pay special attention to the SIM card while handling. Follow the instructions supplied with the SIM card. Insert the battery into the battery compartment as metal contacts meet in the middle of the phone. Push down the top of the battery until it snaps into place. Place the battery cover to the phone as shown.
Installation Charging the Battery CAUTION! Before connecting the travel adapter to the phone you must first install the battery. • If the battery is completely discharged, the charging display will appear on the LCD approximately 1 to 1.5 minutes after connecting TA. • Do not force the connector as this may damage the phone and/or the travel adapter. • Insert the battery pack charger vertically to wall power outlet.
WARNING! • Unplug the charger during lightning storms to avoid electric shock or fire. • Make sure that no sharp-edged items, such as animal teeth or nails, come into contact with the battery. There is a risk of this causing a fire. Disconnecting the charger Disconnect the charger from the phone by pulling the connector, not the cord.
Installation Inserting the memory card Insert the memory card into the slot until the memory card is fully inserted into the slot, as shown in the figure below: Note v Only use memory cards that have been approved by the manufacturer. Some memory cards might not be compliant with the handset. Warning Removing the memory card Carefully remove the memory card out of the socket, as shown in the figure below.
General functions Making International Calls Making a Call 1. Make sure your phone is powered on. 2. Enter a phone number including the area code. To edit a number on the display screen, simply press the key to erase one digit at a time. v Press and hold the key to erase the entire number. 3. Press the key to call. 4. When you want to finish, press the key. Making a Call by Send Key 1. Press and hold the key for the international prefix.
General functions Adjusting the Volume During a call, if you want to adjust the earpiece volume, use the side keys of the phone. In idle mode, you can adjust the key volume using the side keys. Answering a Call When you receive a call, the phone rings and the flashing phone icon appears on the screen. If the caller can be identified, the caller’s phone number (or name/photo if stored in your Address Book) is displayed. General functions 24 1.
Entering Text T9 Mode You can enter alphanumeric characters by using the phone’s keypad. For example, storing names in the Address Book, writing a message, creating scheduling events in the calendar all require entering text. The following text input methods are available in the phone. This mode allows you to enter words with only one keystroke per letter. Each key on the keypad has more than one letter.
General functions Symbolic Mode This mode allows you to enter special characters. Changing the Text Input Mode 1. When you are in a field that allows characters to be entered, you will notice the text input mode indicator in the upper right corner of the display. 2. If you want to change modes, press . The available modes are changed. Using the T9 Mode General functions 26 The T9 predictive text input mode allows you to enter words easily with a minimum number of key presses.
v If the desired word is missing from the word choices list, add it by using the ABC mode. 2. Enter the whole word before editing or deleting any key strokes. 3. Complete each word with a space by pressing the key or key. To delete letters, press . Press and hold down to erase the letters continuously. Using the ABC Mode Use the text. to keys to enter your 1. Press the key labeled with the required letter: v Once for the first letter. v Twice for the second letter. v And so on. 2.
General functions Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode Note v Refer to the table below for more information on the characters available using the keys. Key General functions 28 Characters in the order display Upper Case Lower Case The 123 Mode enables you to enter numbers in a text message (a telephone number, for example). Press the keys corresponding to the required digits before manually switching back to the appropriate text entry mode. . , ? ! ' '' 1 - ( ) @ / : _ .
Selecting functions and options Your phone offers a set of functions that allow you to customise the phone. These functions are arranged in menus and submenus, accessed via the two soft key smarked and . Each menu and sub-menu allows you to view and alter the settings of a particular function. Menu Contacts The roles of the soft keys vary according to the current context; the label on the bottom line of the display just above each key indicates its current role.
In-call menu Your phone provides a number of control functions that you can use during a call. To access these functions during a call, press the left soft key [Options]. During a Call The menu displayed on the handset screen during a call is different than the default main menu displayed when in idle screen, and the options are described below. In-call menu 30 Answering an Incoming Call To answer an incoming call when the handset is ringing, simply press the key.
Muting the Microphone You can mute the microphone during a call by pressing the [Mute] key. The handset can be unmuted by pressing the [Unmute]. When the handset is muted, the caller cannot hear you, but you can still hear them. DTMF tones while calling To switch on DTMF tones while calling (e.g. to use the phone with an automatic switchboard) press the key [Options] followed by Send DTMF on. Select DTMF off to disable DTMF tones. DTMF tones are normally on.
In-call menu Making a Second Call You can make a second call while currently on a call. Enter the second number and press the . When the second call is connected, the first call is automatically placed on hold. You can swap between calls, by pressing the key. Setting Up a Conference Call To set up a conference call, place one call on hold and while the active call is on, press the left soft key and then select the Join menu of Conference call.
Private Call in a Conference Call To have a private call with one caller from a conference call, display the number of the caller you wish to talk to on the screen, then press the left soft key. Select the Private menu of Conference call to put all the other callers on hold. Ending a Conference Call Currently displayed caller from a conference call can be disconnected by pressing the key.
Menu Tree The menu in this phone can be displayed in 2 ways. One is by list type or secondly in grid format. Please note that menu number options are different in each view. The default setting on the phone is set to show the menu in list type, so therefore all the menu number selections throughout the manual are shown according to that setting. The following illustration shows the available menu structure and indicates the: v Number assigned to each menu option.
4. Call history 4.1 All calls 4.2 Missed calls 4.3 Dialled calls 4.4 Received calls 4.5 Call duration 4.6 Call costs 4.7 Data information 5. Messaging 5.1 New message 5.2 Inbox 5.3 Email box 5.4 Drafts 5.5 Outbox 5.6 Sent 5.7 Listen to voicemail 5.8 Info message 5.9 Templates 5.0 Settings 6. Contacts 6.1 Search 6.2 New contact 6.3 Speed dials 6.4 Groups 6.5 Copy all 6.6 Delete all 6.7 Settings 6.
Menu Tree 7. My stuff 7.1 Images 7.2 Sounds 7.3 Videos 7.4 Documents 7.5 Others 7.6 Games & Apps 7.7 External memory Menu Tree 36 8. Tools 8.1 Lost Mobile Track 8.2 Alarm clock 8.3 Calendar 8.4 Calculator 8.5 Memo 8.6 Stop watch 8.7 Unit converter 8.8 World clock 8.9 SIM services 9. Settings 9.1 Date & Time 9.2 Languages 9.3 Display 9.4 Connectivity 9.5 Call 9.6 Security 9.7 Flight mode 9.8 Power saving 9.9 Reset default 9.
Profiles In Profiles, you can adjust and customise the phone tones for different events, environments, or caller groups. There are five preset profiles: General, Silent, Vibrate only, Outdoor and Headset. Each profile can be personalised. Press the left soft key [Menu] and select Profiles using up/down navigation keys. Activate (Menu 1.X.1) 1. A list of profiles is displayed. 2. In the Profiles list, scroll to the profile you want to activate and press the left soft key [OK] or OK key. 3.
Profiles v Power on/off volume: Set the volume of the ringing tone when switching the phone on/off. v Auto answer: This function will be activated only when your phone is connected to the handsfree kit. • Off: The phone will not answer automatically. • After 5 secs: After 5 seconds, the phone will answer automatically. • After 10 secs: After 10 seconds, the phone will answer automatically. Note v All profiles cannot be renamed.
Browser You can access various WAP (Wireless Application Protocol) services such as banking, news, weather reports and flight information. These services are specially designed for mobile phones and they are maintained by WAP service providers. Check the availability of WAP services, pricing and tariffs with your network operator and/or the service provider whose service you wish to use. Service providers will also give you instructions on how to use their services.
Browser Home Menu 2.1 Connects to a homepage. The homepage will be the site which is defined in the activated profile. It will be defined by the service provider if you have not defined it in the activated profile. v Connect: Connects to the selected bookmark. v View: You can see the selected bookmark. v Edit: You can edit the URL and/or the title of the selected bookmark. v New bookmark: Select this to create a new bookmark. Bookmarks Menu 2.
History Menu 2.4 This menu will shows the recent browsing pages. Each profile has submenus as follows: v Activate: Activates the selected profile. v View: You can see the selected profile. v Edit: You can edit the selected profile. Settings v New profile: You can add a new Menu 2.5 profile. You can set the profile, cache and security related to internet service. v Reset all: Allows you to reset all Network profiles (Menu 2.5.1) Cache (Menu 2.5.
Browser Cookies (Menu 2.5.3) Check whether a cookie is used or not. Security certificates (Menu 2.5.4) You can see the list of personal. Certificates that have been stored in your phone. Information Menu 2.6 You can view the information of WAP browser version.
Multimedia You can enjoy various multimedia functions on your phone such as camera, voice recorder, MP3 for your fun and convinience. Note v When the status of the battery indicates low, you may not use the Camera or Multimedia function. v While using Multimedia function, the status of the battery is changeable. Note v Because of the small dimension of the speaker, in some cases the audio could be distorted, especially at maximum volume and when there are lots of bass sounds.
Multimedia Note Note v KE970 doesn’t support the v You should copy MP3 to variable bit rate of all mentioned file types. Therefore, you can’t change the file from MP3 format to AAC. You can transfer MP3 files from a compatible PC to the memory in your phone using the Mass Storage. When you connect the phone to a PC using the USB cable(supplied in the same package), this will be displayed as a removable disk through Windows Explorer.
Equalizer File name Progressive bar Volume level Note v In case that any invalid file is included in the playlist, an error message will pop and go back to the prior screen. Running time Stereo/ Playmode/ 1. Press Multimedia menu, and then select Shuffle Back MP3 player. Status of the 2. Press the left soft key [Options] to music controller access the following menus. Options v Pause: You can pause the playing MP3 Repeat Play all Repeat all file on the MP3 list.
Multimedia v Settings - Equalizer: This menu helps you to adjust to a variety of environments when listening to music. - Play mode: This menu allows to set the play mode: Repeat one, Repeat all,Play all. - Set shuffle: It you select On, you can listen to the music at random. - Visual effect: You can select the visual effect menus: Real spectrum, Fake. This menu allows to change the background of main LCD on playing MP3 file.
Camera Menu 3.2 Using the camera module built in your phone, you can take pictures or record videos. Additionally, you can send photos to other people and select photos as wallpaper. Note v When using the camera, power consumption increases. If this icon appears on the wallpaper, indicating low battery, recharge the battery before use. For your convenience, rotate phone as shown below when taking picture.
Multimedia - Auto Focus function is enabled when taking a picture or sticker shot. Press the camera button half way to adjust focus. 1. Hold down the in standby mode. 2. Focus on the subject to capture the image, and then press the key. 3. If you want to save it, press the key. v Quality [ ]: Allows you to set the image quality from Normal, Fine and Super fine. v Flash [ ]: Allow you to set the flash when you take a photo in dark place.
v White balance [ ]: Allows you to change the settings according to the environment. (Night mode/Fluorescent/ Cloudy/Incandescent/Daylight/Auto) v Mode [ ]: Allows you to set to send a video file through MMS or General. v Resolution [ ]: You may select the following resolution: 128x96, 176x144 . v Shutter tone [ ]: You can set the sound when taking a picture. v Reset settings [ ] : Allows you to reset the settings.
Multimedia Record Album 1. Press OK to start recording. Once recording is started, the message Recording and the counter is displayed. You can view the Sounds folder which lists all sound files saved in the memory. 2. If you want to pause or resume recording, press left soft key or OK key. 3. If you want to finish recording, press right soft key [Stop].
Call history You can check the record of missed, received, and dialled calls only if the network supports the Calling Line Identification (CLI) within the service area. The number and name (if available) are displayed together with the date and time at which the call was made. You can also view call times. All calls Menu 4.1 You can view all lists of outgoing or incoming calls.
Call history Received calls Menu 4.4 This option lets you view the last 50 incoming calls. You can also: v View the number if available and call it or save it in the Address Book v Enter new name for the number and save both in the Address Book v Send a message by this number v Delete the call from the list Call duration Menu 4.5 Allows you to view the duration of your incoming and outgoing calls. You can also reset the call times.
Call costs Menu 4.6 Allows you to check the cost of your last call, all calls, remaining and reset the cost. To reset the cost, you need to enter PIN2 code. Data information Menu 4.7 You can check the amount of data transferred over the network through the GPRS information option. In addition, you can also view how much time you are online.
Messaging New message Menu 5.1 This menu includes functions related to SMS (Short Message Service), MMS (Multimedia Message Service), Email, voice mail, as well as the network’s service messages. 4. Press the [Option] and then press send after entering numbers. v Insert - Symbol: You add special characters. You can write and edit text message. - Image: You can insert the Default graphics or graphics in My pictures that are available for short messages. 1.
- Contacts: You can add phone numbers or e-mail addresses in address book. Multimedia (Menu 5.1.2) - My business card: You can add your Business card to the message. 1. Enter the New message menu by pressing the left soft key [OK]. v Save to drafts: Stores messages in Drafts. v T9 languages: Select the language for T9 input mode. You can also deactivate T9 input mode by selecting ‘T9 off’. v New T9 word: Select the New T9 word for inputting New word into the dictionary.
Messaging v New T9 word: Select the New T9 Note v All messages will be automatically saved in the outbox folder, even after a sending failure. v Preview: You can preview multimedia messages you have created. v Save: You can save multimedia messages To drafts or As templates v Edit subject: Allows you to modify the multimedia message you have chosen. v Slide duration: You can set the duration of slide of multimedia message. v T9 languages: Select the language for Messaging 56 T9 input mode.
Email (Menu 5.1.3) v Save to drafts: Select this to save the To send/receive an email, you should set up the email account. v Edit subject: You can edit the subject. 1. You can input up to 20 email addresses in the To and Cc field. Tip: To input “@”, press the select “@”. and 2. Key in the subject of the mail and press OK. 3. After writing an email message, press the left soft key [Options]. You can access the following option menus. v Send to: You can edit recipients.
Messaging Note v For each e-mail account you may save up to 40 messages (totally 200 for five accounts). In Inbox folder you may save not more than 20 messages, in Drafts and Outbox folders - 5 messages, and in Sent folder up to 10 messages. In case Drafts Outbox or Sent folder is full, and you try to save new message to one of this folders, first saved message will be automatically deleted.
v Delete: You can delete the current message. v Reply: You can reply to the sender. v Reply to all: You can reply to all of the sender. v Forward: You can forward the selected message to another party. v Return call: You can call back to the sender. v Information: You can view information about received messages; Sender’s address, Subject (only for Multimedia message), Message date & time, Message type, Message size. Email box Menu 5.
Messaging Drafts Menu 5.4 Using this menu, you can preset multimedia messages that you use most frequently. This menu shows the preset multimedia message list. The following options are available. v View: You can see the multimedia messages. v Edit: Modifies the message you choose. v Delete: Deletes the message you choose. v Information: You can view information about the message you choose.
Sent Menu 5.6 This menu allows you to view the messages which are already sent. You can check the time and the contents of message. Listen to voicemail Menu 5.7 Once this menu has been selected, simply press the left soft key [OK] to listen to voice mail. You can also hold down the key in standby mode to listen to voice mail. Note v When you receive a voice mail, Menu 5.8 (Dependent to network and subscription) Info service messages are text messages delivered by the network to GSM.
Messaging Read (Menu 5.8.1) 1. When you have received an info service message and select Read to view the message, it will be displayed on the screen. You can read another message by scrolling , or [Next]. You have 6 text templates as below; • Please call me back. • I’m late. I will be there at Topics (Menu 5.8.2) • I’m on the way • Where are you now? (Dependent to network and subscription) • Urgent! Please contact.
v Send via - Text message: Use this to send the selected template message by SMS. - Multimedia message: Use this to send the selected template message by MMS. - Email: This menu allows you to edit, delete or add an email account. v Delete: Deletes the template. v New template: Use this to create new template. v Delete all: Allows you to delete all multimedia messages. Multimedia (Menu 5.9.2) v Save: Allows you to save new multimedia templates you created.
Messaging Settings Menu 5.0 Text message (Menu 5.0.1) v Message types: Text, Voice, Fax, Paging, X.400, Email, ERMES Usually, the type of message is set to Text. You can convert your text into alternative formats. Contact your service provider for the availability of this function. v Validity period: This network service allows you to set how long your messages will be stored at the message centre.
v Read report: You can receive the report Email (Menu 5.0.3) whether the receiver read the message or not. v Email account v Auto download: If you select On, you receive multimedia messages automatically. If you select Off, you receive only notification message in the inbox and then you can check this notification. If you select Home network only, you receive multimedia messages depends on Home network.
Messaging Outgoing mail server: Enter the SMTP address and Port number of computer that sends your email. Outgoing mail authentication: when you send the mail, you can set authentication whether or not. - Advanced settings Outgoing server ID/password: Enter the ID and password for sending your email. Protocol type: Choose your protocol type. (POP3/IMAP4) Maximum receive size: View the Maximum size that you can receive mails. Save to server: Select Yes to leave the messages on the server.
Voicemail number (Menu 5.0.4) Info message (Menu 5.0.6) You can receive the voicemail if your network service provider supports this feature. When a new voicemail is arrived, the symbol will be displayed on the screen. Please check with your network service provider for details of their service in order to configure the phone accordingly. v Receive Yes: If you select this menu, your phone will receive Info service messages.
Contacts Search Menu 6.1 1. Select Search by press the left soft key [OK]. 2. Enter the name that you want to search. Note v Instant searching is available by inputting the initial letter of the name. the number you want, you can send a message(Text/Multimedia/Email) to the selected number. v Send via: You can send the data of phone book via Text message, Multimedia message, Bluetooth or Email. v Delete: You can delete an entry.
New contact Menu 6.2 You can add phonebook entry by using this function. Phone memory capacity is 1000 entries. SIM card memory capacity depends on the cellular service provider. The number of character is SIM dependent feature. Note v Maximum stored name and number length depends on SIMcard type. 1. Select New contact by press left soft key [OK]. 2. Input a name. r, then you can input a Menu 6.3 You can assign any of the keys to with a Name list entry. You can call directly by long pressing this key.
Contacts Groups Menu 6.4 You can list up to the members per each group. There are 7 groups you can make lists to. v View members: Shows the group members you have selected. v Group ringtone: Allows you to specify Copy all Menu 6.5 You can copy entries from SIM card memory to Phone memory and vice versa. v SIM to phone: You can copy the entry from SIM Card to Phone memory. v Phone to SIM: You can copy the entry from Phone memory to SIM Card. ring tone for the group members’ call.
Settings 1. Press the right soft standby mode. Menu 6.7 [Contacts] in 2. Scroll to Settings, then press the left soft key [OK]. v Default memory You can set the default memory from Always ask, SIM or Handset. v View options Scroll to highlight View options, and then press the left soft key [OK]. - Name only: Set the phonebook list with displaying only name. - With picture: Set the phonebook list with the information of character and picture. Information Menu 6.
My stuff Images Menu 7.1 Show the list of image files at My media\Photos in Multimedia memory. v File - Rename: Change the file name of selected file. You can not change the extension of file. v View: You can see the JPG file when pressing OK key or selecting View menu of Option menus. v Delete: Delete a file. Note v You can’t use the following characters \ / : * ? ” < > | v Set as - Full image wallpaper: Currently selected image can be set as a wallpaper.
Warning! Sounds If you remove the external memory during data transfer, it can seriously damage the phone. Show the list of MP3, MP4, AAC, M4A files at My media\Music in Multimedia memory. - Information: Show the file information. v Print via Bluetooth: Most pictures that you’ve taken in the camera mode and downloaded through WAP can be transmitted via Bluetooth to a printer. Menu 7.2 v Play: You can play the MP3 file when pressing OK key or selecting Play menu of Option menu.
My stuff Videos Menu 7.3 Shows the list of 3GP, 3G2 files at My media\Videos in Multimedia memory. Supported file types are 3gp files, that are encoded with MPEG4 and h.263 videocodecs and AMR audio-codec. v Play: You can play the video file when pressing OK key or selecting Play menu of Option menus. v Delete: Delete a file. v Send via: Send the selected file to another device via Multimedia message, Bluetooth or Email.
Warning! v New folder: You can create a new You can’t use the following characters \ / : * ? “ < > | v Multi delete: You can remove a - Move to folder: Move the selected file to the folder. v Delete all: Delete all the files in the - Move to external memory: Move the selected file to the Multimedia memory\external memory Warning! folder. number of files you have selected. list. Documents Menu 7.4 If you remove the external memory during data transfer it will cause serious damage to your phone.
My stuff Others Menu 7.5 Show the list of files in My media\Others in the Multimedia memory. Note v You may send files via Bluetooth only if they are stored in the phone memory, not on the memory card. To send files from the external memory you must first copy it to the internal phone memory. My stuff 76 Note v When you connect the phone with a PC via Bluetooth, you can both send and receive files to the Music and Video folders. You can copy any file type to the Others.
Games & Apps Menu 7.6 In this menu, you can manage the Java applications installed in your phone. You can play or delete downloaded applications, or set the connect option. External memory Menu 7.7 This menu allows you to view Images, Sounds, Videos, Documents and Others in memory card. If the external memory is not available, a pop up message “Please insert external memory” is displayed. Note v The SIM card must be installed in order for the phone to be recognized as a removable disk.
My stuff v When you copy a file to the removable disk, you can see a message on the display “transferring”. It means MASS STORAGE is working and data is being transferred. While “transferring”, do not disconnect the cable. If you disconnect the cable while “transferring”, data will be lost or corrupted and possibly damage the phone. v While phone in MASS storage call and message are not available or wireless service will be deactivated.
Tools Lost Mobile Track (LMT) Menu 8.1 The LMT feature of this phone provides you with the ability to have a tracking system in place for your mobile in case you loose or misplace it. The moment an unauthorized user uses your phone, a SMS is triggered from your phone and the message is send to your pre-defined number. The SMS will be sent to your predefined numbers without the notice of the un-authorized user. Set LMT (Menu 8.1.1) 1. A List of tools is displayed. 2.
Tools When you enter menu “lost mobile Track”, a LMT code dialogue will be displayed, which needs an authenticate code to enter inside the LMT options. Note v default LMT code is “0000”. How to use :Lost Mobile Track 1.Go to tools menu. On top “SET LMT” menu is available for making LMT ON/OFF(Activate/Deactivate). 2. Select Lost Mobile track You should always activate LMT for enabling LMT settings. 4.
Alarm clock Menu 8.2 You can set the alarm clock to go on at a specified time. 1. Select On and enter the alarm time you want. 2. Select the repeat period: Once, Mon-Fri, Mon-Sat, Everyday. 3. Select the alarm tone you want and press [Save]. Calendar Menu 8.3 When you enter this menu a calendar will show up. On top of the screen there are sections for date. Whenever you change the date, the calendar will be updated according to the date. And square cursor will be used to locate the certain day.
Tools In the scheduler mode, press left soft key [Options] as follows; v View View all schedules for the chosen day. Use q,r to browse through the note lists. If you want to view the note in detail, press left soft key [OK]. Press left soft key [Options] to View, Delete, New schedule SMS, New schedule, Send via Text message/Multimedia message/Bluetooth/Email, Edit, Calendar, Scheduler tone, All schedules, Go to date, Multi delete and Delete all.
Schedule SMS (SSMS) The SSMS feature of this phone provides you with the ability to send the Schedule SMS by Scheduled time and date. The moment schedule matches with the current time and date, a Schedule SMS is triggered from your phone and the message is send to your pre-defined number. In the calendar menu, press left soft key [Options] and select All schedules and it displays following options. v View View all scheduled SMS and Calendar Schedule. v New schedule SMS Allows you to add new schedule SMS.
Tools When you enter Calendar menu a Calendar is show up. Press Left Soft Key and select new schedule SMS option. 1. Select New schedule SMS 2. Use a navigation key to select a sign for calculation. 2. Select Right soft Navigation key to Switch ON/OFF SSMS 3. Then input the numbers. 3. Enter Date, time, phone number and message. 5. To input the decimal number, press key. 4.Select Left Soft Key or OK key to Save. 6. To end Calculator, press the right soft key [Back]. Calculator Tools 84 1.
1. You can select one of unit types by pressing [OK] key. Note v If you want to change the text input mode, press the Stop watch in order. 2. Select the unit you want to convert by pressing q, r. It’s impossible to input “-” symbol in unit converter. 3. Select the standard value by using , . Menu 8.6 1. Press [Start] to take time and record the lap time by pressing [Lap]. 2. Press [Stop] to ascertain the record of lap time. World clock Menu 8.8 3. Press [Reset] to default condition.
Tools 1. Select the city corresponding to your time zone by pressing the left/right navigation keys and left soft key [Zoom in] one or more times. The local date and time are displayed. 2. If you want to change the time display in standby mode to the selected time, press [OK] key. SIM services Menu 8.9 This menu depends on SIM and the network services.
Settings Date & Time Menu 9.1 You can set functions relating to the date and time. Set date (Menu 9.1.1) Auto update (Menu 9.1.5) Select On, the phone will automatically update the data and time. You can enter the current date. Languages Date format (Menu 9.1.2) You can change the language for the display texts in your phone. This change will also affect the Language Input mode. You can set the Date format such as YYYY/MM/DD, DD/MM/YYYY, MM/DD/YYYY. Menu 9.
Settings Brightness (Menu 9.3.3) Standby text (Menu 9.3.7) You can set the brightness of LCD: 100%, 80%, 60%, 40% If you select On, you can edit the text which is displayed in standby mode. Home screen shortcut (Menu 9.3.4) Network name (Menu 9.3.8) Selecting On displays the functionalities of 4 Navigation keys and Menu key as pictures on the middle of the idle window. (Profiles/Messaging/ Favourites/Contacts) If this function is activated, network name will be displayed on LCD. Menu style (Menu 9.
v Bluetooth on/off Note v If you use LG PC Sync via Bluetooth, you can exchange the data only within phonebook v When you receive data from another Bluetooth device, the phone requests confirmation. After confirming the transfer, the file will be copied on to your phone. v Depending on the file type, it will You can activate or cancel the Bluetooth function. v Device list You can view all devices which your KE970 is already paired to.
Settings - Add new: Allows to search new Bluetooth devices and add them to your phone’s list of paired devices. When you select Add new your handset will start to search for Bluetooth devices within range. Once the device you wish to pair appears on the list press the right soft key [Stop]. Scroll to the desired device and press the left soft key [Pair]. You will then be asked to enter a passcode.
- My name: You can set the name of Bluetooth device. The default name is LG KE970. - My address: You can view the address of your Bluetooth device. Network (Menu 9.4.2) You can select a network which will be registered either automatically or manually. Network selection (Menu 9.4.2.1) Usually, the network selection is set to Automatic. v Manual: The phone will find the list of available networks and show you them.
Settings GPRS attach (Menu 9.4.2.2) Network profile (Menu 9.4.2.3) You can set GPRS attach service. v Data connections v Power on If you select this menu, the phone is automatically registered to a GPRS network when you switch the phone on. Starting a WAP or PC dial-up application created the connection between phone and network and data transfer is possible. When you end the application, GPRS connection is ended but the registration to the GPRS network remains.
- Call speed: The speed of your data connection; 9600 or 14400 (Depends on Operator) - Primary server: Input the IP address of the primary DNS server you access. - Linger time: You need to enter timeout period. After entering that, the WAP navigation service will be unavailable if any data is not input or transferred. - Secondary server: Input the IP address of the secondary DNS server you access. - Primary server: Input the IP address of the primary DNS server you access.
Settings 2. Select USB Mass Storage Device, click on Stop. The following message will appear: “The ‘USB Mass Storage Device’ device can now be safely removed from the system” 3. Then remove the cable. v If busy Diverts voice calls when the phone is in in-call. v If no reply Diverts voice calls which you do not answer. v If out of reach Call Menu 9.5 You can set the menu relevant to a call by pressing [Select] in the Setting menu. v All data calls Call divert (Menu 9.5.
The submenus Answer mode (Menu 9.5.2) Call divert menus have the submenus shown below. v Slide open - Activate Activate the corresponding service. To voice mailbox Forwards to message centre. This function is not shown at All data calls and All fax calls menus. To other number Inputs the number for diverting. If you select this menu, you can receive an incoming call when you open the slide. v Any key If you select this menu, you can receive a call by pressing any key except [End] key.
Settings v On You can send your phone number to another party. Your phone number will be shown on the receiver’s phone. v Off Your phone number will not be shown. Call waiting (Menu9.5.4) (network dependent) v Activate If you select Activate, you can accept a waiting (receiving) call. v Cancel If you select Cancel, you cannot recognize the waiting (receiving) call. v View status Settings 96 Shows the status of Call waiting. Minute minder (Menu 9.5.
Security Menu 9.6 PIN code request (Menu 9.6.1) In this menu, you can set the phone to ask for the PIN code of your SIM card when the phone is switched on. If this function is activated, you’ll be requested to enter the PIN code. 1. Select PIN code request in the security settings menu, and then press [OK]. 2. Set On/Off. 3. If you want to change the setting, you need to enter PIN code when you switch on the phone. Phone lock (Menu 9.6.
Settings Call barring (Menu 9.6.3) The Call barring service prevents your phone from making or receiving certain category of calls. This function requires the call barring password. You can view the following submenus. v All outgoing The barring service for all outgoing calls. v Outgoing international The barring service for all outgoing international calls. v O/G international except home country The barring service for all international outgoing calls except home network.
Fixed dial number (Menu 9.6.4) Change codes (Menu 9.6.5) (SIM dependent) PIN is an abbreviation of Personal Identification Number to prevent use by unauthorized person. You can restrict your outgoing calls to selected phone numbers. The numbers are protected by your PIN2 code. v On You can restrict your outgoing calls to selected phone numbers. v Off You can cancel fixed dialling function. You can change the access codes: Security code, PIN1 code, PIN2 code. 1.
Settings Flight mode Menu 9.7 This allows you to use only the phone’s features that do not require the use of the wireless network when you are in an airplane or in places where the wireless network is prevented. If you set the flight mode on, the icon will be displayed on the screen instead of the network signal icon.
Accessories There are various accessories for your mobile phone. You can select these options according to your personal communication requirements. Standard Battery Travel Adapter This charger allows you to charge the battery while away from home or your office. Hands free ear microphone Note ] Always use genuine LG accessories. ] Failure to do this may invalidate your warranty.
Technical data General Product name: KE970 System: GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Ambient Temperatures Max: +55°C Min: -10°C Technical data 102
Memo
Memo
Memo
Memo
Memo
MEA card cover(120-120)_MCDE00003 3 2008.1.
MEA card cover(120-120)_MCDE00001 1 2008.1.
o S ervice for LG Mobile Phone is available in the following countries (List includes Only the Main Service Centers. Other area’s customers can contact the Headquarter of their countries for further information) Middle East Countries o 13 Countries UAE Saudi Arabia Qatar Oman Kuwait Bahrain Yemen Iran Iraq Lebanon Egypt Syria Jordan MEA card(120_120) _0705.
Middle East Countries UAE Saudi Arabia Qatar Oman Kuwait Bahrain MEA card(120_120) _0705.indd 2 o o o o o o Yemen Iran Iraq Lebanon Egypt Syria Jordan o o o o o o o 2008.7.
UAE Headquarter o o o o o o Agent Name : Address : Telephone No. : Fax No. : Web Site : Email : Jumbo Electronics Co. Ltd. Telecommunication Division, P.O. Box 3426, Dubai, UAE +97143367999 (LG Customer Information Center: 800 54) +97143340821 http://www.jumbocorp.com Roby.George@jumbo.ae Service Centers Area Address Dubai (Karama) Near Strand Cinema, P.O. Box 3426, Dubai Telephone No. Fax No. +97143362621 +97143360847 Abudhabi Regional Service Center P.O.
UAE Headquarter o o o o o o Agent Name : Address : Telephone No. : Fax No. : Web Site : Email : Al Sayegh Brothers Trading L.L.C Al Sayegh Brothers Building, Muraqqabat, Deira, P.O. Box 55106, Dubai, UAE +97142663200 (LG Customer Information Center: 800 54) +97142669964 www.alsa-g.com helpdesk@alsa-g.com Service Centers Area Address Telephone No. Fax No. Dubai Al Sayegh Brothers Building, Muraqqabat, Deira P.O.
UAE Headquarter o o o o o o Agent Name Address Telephone No. Fax No. Web Site Email : : : : : : Axiom Telecom World Trade Centre, P. O. Box 9266, Dubai UAE 04 3318555 (LG Customer Information Center: 800 54) 04 3318855 www.axiomtelecom.com atcc@axiomtelecom.com Service Centers in UAE Area Address Telephone No. Dubai Shk Zayed Road, Al Kawakeb Building, Block C, P O Box 9266, Dubai, UAE 00971 43210600 00971 43210400 Fax No. Abu Dhabi Defense Road, Block A 4, Next to Al Sultan Restaurant.
Saudi Arabia Headquarter o o o o o o Agent Name : Address : Telephone No. : Fax No. : Web Site : Email : Axiom Telecom 9th Floor, Al Subaiee Tower, Abdul Aziz Highway, Al Khobar, KSA, P O Box 4742 00966 38019000 00966 38019051 www.axiomtelecom.com ksasupport@axiomtelecom.com Service Centers in KSA Area Address Telephone No. KHOBAR 9, Al Fanar Complex, Khobar-Dammam Highway, Khobar 31952, KSA 00966 38587922 00966 38587910 Fax No. RIYADH Olaya Main Street, Nr.
Saudi Arabia Headquarter o o o o o Agent Name Address Telephone No. Fax No. Email : : : : : AL Farida Telecom Co. Ltd. (SKY) P.o. box 359, Riyadh 11411, Riyadh, Saudi Arabia. +96612112345 +96612112311 marwan.alshare@alhokair.com.sa Service Centers Area Address Telephone No. Riyadh P.o. box 359, Riyadh 11411, Riyadh, Saudi Arabia +966121112345 +96612112311 Fax No. MEA card(120_120) _0705.indd 7 2008.7.
Saudi Arabia Headquarter o o o o o o Agent Name Address Telephone No. Fax No. Web Site Email : : : : : : Itsalat International Co. P.O. Box 9798, Dammam, 31423, Saudi Arabia. +96638343000 +96638334664 http://www.itsalat.com ashraf.hassan@itsalat.com, headoffice@itsalat.com Service Centers Area Address Telephone No. Fax No. Jeddah Palestine st.
QATAR Headquarter o o o o o o Agent Name Address Telephone No. Fax No. Web Site Email : : : : : : Video Home & Electronics Center Musherib Street, P.O.Box 4668, Doha, Qatar +9744315865 +9744437876 http://www.jumboqatar.com alexjacob@jumboqatar.com Service Centers Area Address Telephone No. Fax No. Doha Musherib street, P.O.Box 4668, Doha, Qatar +9744315865 +9744437876 MEA card(120_120) _0705.indd 9 2008.7.
OMAN Headquarter o o o o o o Agent Name Address Telephone No. Fax No. Web Site Email : : : : : : Oman Gulf Enterprises L.L.C P.O. Box 175, PC 117, Muscat, OMAN +96824502866/8 +96824502019 http://www.otegroup.com sudhirk@otegroup.com Service Centers Area Address Telephone No. Fax No. Salalah P.O. Box 211, PC2823, Salalah, OMAN +96823210684 +96823210145 Sur P.O. Box 480, PC 411, Sur, OMAN +96825545107 +96825545107 Nizwah P.O. Box 784, PC 611, Nizwah, OMAN +96825412549 +96825412549 Sohar P.O.
OMAN Headquarter o o o o o o Agent Name Address Telephone No. Fax No. Web Site Email : : : : : : Cellucom and Partners L.L.Cl Office No 7, Makha Business Center, Ruwi High Street, Muscat, Oman +96824835010 +96824834234 http://cellucom.com info@cellucom.com Service Centers Area Address Telephone No. Fax No. Muscat, Oman Office No 7, Makha Business Center, Ruwi High Street, Muscat, Oman +96824835010 +96824834234 11 MEA card(120_120) _0705.indd 11 2008.7.
KUWAIT Headquarter o Agent Name o Address o Telephone No. o Fax No. o Web Site o Email : : : : : : Cellucom Kuwait WLL Salem Al Mubarak Street, Shaha Complex, P.O. Box: 4019, Salmiya, Kuwait +9655710801 +9655710803 http://cellucom.com info@cellucom.com Service Centers Area Address Telephone No. Fax No. Salmiya, Kuwait Salem Al Mubarak Street, Shaha Complex, P.O. Box: 4019, Salmiya, Kuwait +9655710801 +9655710803 12 MEA card(120_120) _0705.indd 12 2008.7.
KUWAIT Headquarter o Agent Name o Address : Al Ghanim Sons Group. : First Floor,Gharabally Building, Dhajeej Area, South Farwaniya, SAFAT-13097, Kuwait. o Telephone No. : + 965 4331709 o Fax No. : + 965 4344790 o Email : snair@alghanim-sons.com Service Centers Area Address Telephone No. South Farwaniya First Floor,Gharabally Building,Dhajeej + 965 4331709 Area,South Farwaniya , SAFAT-13097,Kuwait Fax No. + 965 4344790 13 MEA card(120_120) _0705.indd 13 2008.7.
BAHRAIN Headquarter o o o o o o Agent Name Address Telephone No. Fax No. Web Site Email : : : : : : Cellucom WLL Shop no 5&6, Gosi commercial Complex, Manama, Kingdom of Bahrain +97317294026 +97317294046 http://cellucom.com info@cellucom.com Service Centers Area Address Manama, Bahrain Shop no 5&6, Gosi commercial Complex, Manama, Kingdom of Bahrain Telephone No. Fax No. +97317294026 +97317294046 14 MEA card(120_120) _0705.indd 14 2008.7.
BAHRAIN Headquarter o o o o o o Agent Name Address Telephone No. Fax No. Web Site Email : : : : : : Fono Gosi Complex, Exhibition Rd, Manama, Bahrain 00973 17312001 00973 17310884 www. axiomtelecom.com fcc@almoayyedintl.com.bh Service Centers in Bahrain Area Address Telephone No. Bahrain Fono, Gosi Complex, Exhibition Rd, Manama, Bahrain 00973 17312001 00973 17310884 Fax No. 15 MEA card(120_120) _0705.indd 15 2008.7.
YEMEN Headquarter o o o o o Agent Name Address Telephone No. Fax No. Email : : : : : Al Mutarreb Hada st.Al Mutarreb for Trading, P.O. Box-19272 +9671503240 +9671500878 mutarreb@y.net.ye Service Centers Area Address Telephone No. Fax No. Yemen Hada st. Al Muttrieb for Trading P.O. Box 19272 +9671503240 +9671500878 16 MEA card(120_120) _0705.indd 16 2008.7.
IRAN Headquarter o o o o o o Agent Name Address Telephone No. Fax No. Web Site Email : Persian Telecom (Al Raheel General Trading Co., L.L.C.) : First florr, No.140, Ghaem Magham St., Tehran, IRAN : +982188302922/+982188827100 : +982188302921 : http://www.persiantelecomclub.com : bahrami@persiantelecom.ir Service Centers Area Address Telephone No. Fax No. Tehran First florr, No.140, Ghaem Magham St., Tehran, IRAN +982188302922 +982188827100 +982188302921 Tehran No.
IRAQ Headquarter o o o o o o Agent Name Address Telephone No. Fax No. Web Site Email : : : : : : Al-Seera Communication Company 14th Ramadan Road, Al-Mansour Street, Baghdad, Iraq +9647901393615 +96415427798 http://www.alseera.com seeracom@hotmail.com, mohammed_d_r@hotmail.com Service Centers Area Address Telephone No. Fax No. Baghdad 14th Ramadan Road, Al Mansour Street +9647901393615 +96415427798 18 MEA card(120_120) _0705.indd 18 2008.7.
LEBANON Headquarter o o o o o Agent Name Address Telephone No. Fax No. Email : : : : : Digital technologies Jdeidet El Metn, Beirut Lebanon +961 01-236110 +961-1-236110 digitaltechnologies@idm.net.lb Service Centers Area Address Telephone No. Fax No. Beirut Jdeidet El Metn, near Gallery Khabbaz +961 01-236110 +961-1-236110 19 MEA card(120_120) _0705.indd 19 2008.7.
EGYPT Headquarter o o o o o Agent Name Address Telephone No. Fax No. Email : : : : : Delta Communication 39 M Tawfik Diab – Makram Ebied, Nasar City, Egypt +2027487100 (LG Customer Information Center: 19960) +2025201241 salahezz@delta-group.org Service Centers Area Address Telephone No. Fax No. Nasar City 39 M Tawfik Diab – Makram Ebied, Nasar City, Egypt +2027487100 +2025201241 20 MEA card(120_120) _0705.indd 20 2008.7.
EGYPT Headquarter o o o o o o Agent Name : Address : Telephone No. : Fax No. : Web Site : Email : Axiom Telecom 8, Al Oboor Buildings, Salah Salem Street, Cairo, Egypt 002 02 4015050/4013939 002 02 www. axiomtelecom.com menon@axiomtelecom.com Service Centers Area Address AXIOM-CAIRO 3, Abdul Fida Street, Zamalik, Cairo Province, 002 02 7377881 Egypt Telephone No. Fax No.
SYRIA Headquarter o o o o o Agent Name Address Telephone No. Fax No. Email : : : : : ECC (Engineering Commerce Co.) Abo Romaneh Shakib Arslan str. +963113347720/1/3/4/5/6, +963113347465 +963113333825 ecc@net.sy Service Centers Area Address Telephone No. Fax No. Damascus Kaboon – facing the bus Pullman station +963119345 +963114537010 Aleppo Jameilia beside Alseddeik Mosque +963212284002 +963212122367 22 MEA card(120_120) _0705.indd 22 2008.7.
JORDAN Headquarter o o o o o Agent Name : 7 Global For Communication Equipments Address : Jordan - Amman Telephone No. : 00962 6 5563008 Fax No. : 962-6-5563009 Web Site/Email : www.7global.mobi / Info@7global.info Service Centers Area Address Telephone No. Jordan Jordan - Amman 00962 6 5518883 00962 6 5563008 Fax No. 23 MEA card(120_120) _0705.indd 23 2008.7.
Africa Countries Morocco Tunisia Libya Algeria Kenya Nigeria South Africa MEA card(120_120) _0705.indd 24 o o o o o o o 2008.7.
MOROCCO Headquarter o Agent Name o Address : LGEMC (LG Electronics Morocco S.A.R.L) : Immebule 2, Zenith Millenium, Sidi Maarouf, Lotissement Attawfiq, casa, Morocco o Telephone No. : 081005454 (LG Customer Information Center) o Fax No. : +21222975959 o Email : abdelhamid@lge.com Service Centers Area Address Telephone No. Cetelec 5 rue Albouhtouri casa anfa Maroc +21222270790 Fax No.
TUNISIA Headquarter o o o o o o Agent Name Address Telephone No. Fax No. Web Site Email : TTE (Tunisian Telecom Electric Distribution) : Tunisian telecom Distribution, 22 Rue 8600 ZI Charguia, Tunis, Tunisia : +21670838424 : +21670838422 : http://www.tte.com.tn : f.hamdi@tte.com.tn Service Centers Area Address Telephone No. Fax No. Tunis 22 Rue 8600 ZI Charguia, Tunis, Tunisia +21670838424 +21670838422 26 MEA card(120_120) _0705.indd 26 2008.7.
LIBYA Headquarter o o o o o Agent Name Address Telephone No. Fax No. Web Site/Email : : : : : AL MASAR the Import of Electronic Devices Cedy Elmasri, Almadar Street Tripoli Libya 00218-21-3600167 00218-21-3600167 www.massar.com.ly / Info@massar.com.ly Service Centers Area Address Telephone No. Fax No.
ALGERIA Headquarter o o o o o Agent Name Address Telephone No. Fax No. Email : : : : : Algerika 409, Lotissement El-Bouroudj, Ain-Allah Delly Brahim Alger. +21321917494 +21321917505 garantie@algerie-k.com Service Centers Area Address Telephone No. Fax No. Algiers 409, Lotissement El-Bouroudj, Ain-Allah Delly Brahim Alger +21321917494 +21321917505 28 MEA card(120_120) _0705.indd 28 2008.7.
KENYA Headquarter o o o o o Agent Name Address Telephone No. Fax No. Email : : : : : Skytel Limited Wilson Airport, PO Box 42444, Nairobi, Kenya +25420252240/1 +25420252240 alex.kabuagi@xcom.co.ke Service Centers Area Address Telephone No. Nairobi Wilson Airport, PO Box 42444, Nairobi, Kenya +25420252240/1 +25420252240 Fax No. 29 MEA card(120_120) _0705.indd 29 2008.7.
NIGERIA Headquarter o o o o o Agent Name Address Telephone No. Fax No. Email : : : : : LGEAL (LG Electronics Antwerp Logistics N.V.) 65C, Opebi Road, Ikeja Lagos. Nigeria +23418935454 (LG Customer Information Center) +23417936510, 4977753 cland@lge.com Service Centers Area Address Telephone No. Fax No. Lagos 65C, Opebi Road, Ikeja Lagos. Nigeria +23418927777 +23417936510 30 MEA card(120_120) _0705.indd 30 2008.7.
SOUTH AFRICA Headquarter o Agent Name o Address o o o o : Vodacare : ARC,Gound Floor, east wing, Vodacom Service Park, Vodacom Boulevard, Vodavalley,Midrand,SA. Telephone No. : +27115464039 (LG Customer Information Center : 0861545454) Fax No. : +27115464331 Web Site : http://www.cellucity.co.za Email : craig.gower@vodacom.co.za Service Centers Area Address Telephone No. Fax No.
SOUTH AFRICA Headquarter o o o o o Agent Name Address Telephone No. Fax No. Email : : : : : Combase 44 Old Pretoria Road,Midrand,SA. +27116558000 (LG Customer Information Center : 0861545454) +2711315 8387 deanw@combase.co.za Service Centers Area Address Telephone No. Fax No. Capetown 64-70 Edward Street,Belville,Capetown.. +27219102940 +27219103011 Durban 379 Umbilo Road,Durban +27312060877 +27312057655 Port Elizabeth Shop 1, Salgar House,18 Newton Street, Newton Park.
SOUTH AFRICA Headquarter o Agent Name o Address : IXIA Trading 348 PTY Ltd : Block B, Lone Creek, Waterfall Park, Bekker Street, Vorna Valley, Midrand, 1685, South Africa o Telephone No. : +27118057863 (LG Customer Information Center : 0861545454) o Fax No. : +27866339459 o Email : david@ixia.co.za Service Centers Area Address Telephone No. Fax No.
Other Countries Turkey o Pakistan o MEA card(120_120) _0705.indd 34 2008.7.
TURKEY Headquarter o o o o o o Agent Name Address Telephone No. Fax No. Web Site Email : : : : : : Teleservice Int. Telefon Dr. Fahrettin Kerim Gökay Cad. No:31-1 Altunizade Üsküdar TR-34662 Istanbul +902165450404 +902165445656 http://www.teleservice.com sinan.kus@teleservice.com Service Centers Area Address Istanbul Dr. Fahrettin Kerim Gökay Cad. No:31-1 Altunizade +902165450404 Üsküdar TR-34662 Istanbul Mithatpasa cad.
PAKISTAN Headquarter o o o o o Agent Name Address Telephone No. Fax No. Email : : : : : New Allied Mobile Communication 3/3 Ground Floor, Rabbiya Garden, M.C.H.S., Shaheed-e-Millat Road, Karachi, Pakistan. +92214388271/74 +92214388278 zpalg@yahoo.com Service Centers Area Address Telephone No. Fax No. Karachi N-1, 4th Floor, Al -Haroon, 10 Aga Khan III Road, Karachi. 74400.
MEA card cover(120-120)_MCDE00002 2 2008.1.
Memo
ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ اﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞKE970 : اﻟﻨﻈﺎ مGSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 : درﺟﺔ اﻟﺤﺮارة اﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ أﻗﺼﻰ+55°C : ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻓﻨﻴﺔ أدﻧﻰ-10°C : 107
اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎت ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﻄﻊ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪة ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﻣﻦ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل. ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎت ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺳﻔﺮ 106 ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎت اﻻذن -ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺧﻼل ﺗﻮاﺟﺪك ﺧﺎرج اﻟﻤﻨﺰل أو اﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ. xﻳﺆدي ﻋﺪم اﻟﻘﻴﺎم ﺑﺬﻟﻚ إﻟﻰ إﺑﻄﺎل اﻟﻀﻤﺎن. ﺟﻬﺎز ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت/ﻗﺮص ﻣﺪﻣﺞ xﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎت ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻷﺧﺮى؛ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ أو وﻛﻴﻞ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ اﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻻﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎرات. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻮاﻟﻚ إﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﺒﺎدل اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت.
ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻣﻴﺰات اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﺪى ﺗﻮاﺟﺪك ﻓﻲ اﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮة أو ﻓﻲ اﻷﻣﻜﻨﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ. إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺮﺣﻼت اﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ،ﻓﻴﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪﻻ ً ﻣﻦ رﻣﺰ إﺷﺎرة اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. xﻗﻴﺪ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﺟﺮاء اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت )أو ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻬﺎ( ،ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻄﻮارئ، أو اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻴﺰات أﺧﺮى ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. xﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ إﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺮﺣﻼت اﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ وإﻋﺎدة ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.
اﻻﻋﺪادات اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ: xإﻳﻘﺎف -ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﻟﻤﺤﺪد. ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻄﻠﺐ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ. إﻟﻐﺎءﺿﺒﻂ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة. ﻋﺮض اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔﻋﺮض اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻮاء ﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﻈﻮرة أم ﻻ. رﻗﻢ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (4.6.9 )اﺳﺘﻨﺎدا ً إﻟﻰ (SIM ﻟﺤﻈﺮ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻋﻠﻰ أرﻗﺎم ﻫﻮاﺗﻒ ﻣﺤﺪدة ،ﺗﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ رﻣﺰ .PIN2 اﻻﻋﺪادات xﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ 104 ﻟﺤﻈﺮ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻋﻠﻰ أرﻗﺎم ﻫﻮاﺗﻒ ﻣﺤﺪدة.
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام رﻣﺰ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎدي اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮح ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ، ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ رﻣﺰ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ،وذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻔﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ »ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ«. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻔﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻹﻋﺪاد »ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ،«SIMﻓﺴﻮف ﻳﻄﻠﺐ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ رﻣﺰ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SIM ﺣﻈﺮ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (3.6.9 ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﻈﺮ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ إﺟﺮاء أو ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت .ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺮور اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺤﻈﺮ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت. ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
اﻻﻋﺪادات إﻋﺎدة اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ً )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (6.5.9 xﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﺤﺎول اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﺎودة اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل. xإﻳﻘﺎف ﻟﻦ ﻳﻘﻮم ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﺈﺟﺮاء أي ﻣﺤﺎوﻻت ﻟﻤﻌﺎودة اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺸﻞ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل. إرﺳﺎل DTMF )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (7.5.9 اﻻﻋﺪادات ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إرﺳﺎل ﻧﻐﻤﺎت اﻻﺗﺼﺎل أﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻚ أو ﺧﺪﻣﺎت اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى. 102 اﻋﺪادات اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻃﻠﺐ رﻣﺰ PIN اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 6.9 )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (1.6.
إرﺳﺎل رﻗﻤﻲ )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (3.5.9 )ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬا ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ واﻻﺷﺘﺮاك( xﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ إرﺳﺎل رﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺨﻄﻴﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﻂ 1 أو ﺧﻂ .2 xﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻹرﺳﺎل رﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ إﻟﻰ ﻃﺮف آﺧﺮ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض رﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ. xإﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ رﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻚ. )ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ( xﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ،ﻗﺒﻮل )ﺗﻠﻘﻲ( ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر. xإﻟﻐﺎء ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ إﻟﻐﺎء ،ﻗﺒﻮل )ﺗﻠﻘﻲ( ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر.
اﻻﻋﺪادات xﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ إﻟﻰ أﺣﺪ اﻷرﻗﺎم اﻟﺬي ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻼ ﺷﺮوط. xﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ اﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ إﻟﻰ أﺣﺪ اﻷرﻗﺎم اﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ ﺑﻼ ﺷﺮوط. xإﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻜﻞ إﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت. اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ أدﻧﺎه. ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ. اﻻﻋﺪادات ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ 100 إرﺳﺎل إﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ .
.1اﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮق ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻹﻋﻼم. ]ﻓﺼﻞ أو إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺠﻬﺎز[ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت .2ﺣ ّﺪد ﺟﻬﺎز USBذات اﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ اﻟﺴﻌﺔ ،واﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮق ﺗﻮﻗﻒ. ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ» :ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻵن إزاﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎز USBذات اﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ اﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﺄﻣﺎن« )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (1.5.9 ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ وﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ وﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻮاردة إﻟﻰ رﻗﻢ آﺧﺮ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،اﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺰود اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ. xﻛﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﻼ ﺷﺮوط. .
اﻻﻋﺪادات ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل :ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل :ﺳﺮﻋﺔاﺗﺼﺎل اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت؛ 9600أو 14400 ّ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ( )ﺣﺴﺐ زﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﺎﻃﺆ :إﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﺎج ﻟﻤﻬﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ.ﻓﺒﻌﺪ إدﺧﺎل ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﻤﻬﻠﺔ ،ﺳﺘﻜﻮن ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ WAPﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ إذا ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ إدﺧﺎل أو ﻧﻘﻞ أي ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت. اﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ :اﻛﺘﺐ ﻋﻨﻮان IPﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ DNSاﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ اﻟﺬي ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮل إﻟﻴﻪ. اﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮي :اﻛﺘﺐ ﻋﻨﻮان IPﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ DNSاﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮي اﻟﺬي ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮل إﻟﻴﻪ. >إﻋﺪادات
ﺿﺒﻂ ) GPRSاﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (2.2.4.9 وﺿﻊ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (3.2.4.9 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ GPRSﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﺮوف ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ. xﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺘﻢ آﻟ ًﻴﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ GPRSﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻃﻠﺐ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ أو WAPاﻟﺬي أﻧﺸﺄ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ واﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ وﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت .ﻋﻨﺪ إﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻞ اﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ، ﻳﺘﻢ إﻧﻬﺎء اﺗﺼﺎل GPRSوﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻈﻞ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ GPRSﻗﺎﺋ ًﻤﺎ.
اﻻﻋﺪادات xإﻋﺪادات ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ رؤﻳﺘﻲ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬهاﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺮﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ أﺟﻬﺰة ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث اﻷﺧﺮى. اﺳﻤﻲ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺎز ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث.اﻻﺳﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ .LG KE970 ﻋﻨﻮاﻧﻲ :ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻋﻨﻮان ﺟﻬﺎزاﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮث اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻚ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (2.4.9 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ إﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً أو ﻳﺪوﻳﺎً. ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (1.2.4.9 اﻻﻋﺪادات ﻋﺎدة ،ﻳﻜﻮن ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺎً إﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ.
xﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻛﻞ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﻲ اﻗﺘﺮن ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً .KE970ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎل أدﺧﻠﺖ أﺟﻬﺰة ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ ،ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات. اﺗﺼﺎل/ﻗﻄﻊ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل :ﺑﻌﺪ اﻻﻗﺘﺮان ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔاﻟﺮأس أو ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ رأس اﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ،ﻋﻠﻴﻚ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺘﻠﻚ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة .وﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ٍﺬ اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ. إ ﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ :ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ أﺟﻬﺰةﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث ﺟﺪﻳﺪة وإﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ إﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ،ﺗﺒﺪأ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ أﺟﻬﺰة ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة داﺧﻞ اﻟﻨﻄﺎق.
اﻻﻋﺪادات اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 4.9 )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (1.4.9 ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﺗﺼﺎل أﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺠﻮال اﻟﻤﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ووﺣﺪاﺗﻬﺎ اﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ وأﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ اﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻻﺳﻠﻜ ًﻴﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة .ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث ﻻﺳﻠﻜ ًﻴﺎ ،اﻷﻣﺮ اﻟﺬي ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺮأس اﻟﻤﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث أو رﺑﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ وﻣﺎ إﻟﻴﻬﺎ.
اﻟﺴﻄﻮع ﻧﻤﻂ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (3.3.9 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮع ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﻋﻠﻰ: 100%و %80و %60و %40 اﺧﺘﺼﺎرات اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻳﺰودك اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺄرﺑﻌﺔ أﻧﻤﺎط اﺗﺼﺎل. )ﻧﻤﻂ اﻟﻠﻮن /ﻧﻤﻂ اﻟﺨﺮز /ﻧﻤﻂ اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ /ﻧﻤﻂ دﻓﺘﺮاﻟﺮﺳﻢ( )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (4.3.9 ﻧﺺ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض وﻇﺎﺋﻒ 4ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺗﻨﻘﻞ وﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﺼﻮر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷوﺳﻂ ﻣﻦ إﻃﺎر اﻟﺨﻤﻮل) .أﻧﻤﺎط/إرﺳﺎل اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ/ اﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼت/ﺟﻬﺎت اﻻﺗﺼﺎل( ﻧﻤﻂ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (6.3.9 )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (5.3.
اﻻﻋﺪادات اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ واﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1.9 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ واﻟﻮﻗﺖ. ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (1.1.9 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ. ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (2.1.9 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻳﻮم /ﺷﻬﺮ /ﺳﻨﺔ أو ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺷﻬﺮ /ﻳﻮم /ﺳﻨﺔ أو ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺳﻨﺔ /ﺷﻬﺮ /ﻳﻮم. ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (3.1.9 اﻻﻋﺪادات ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ. 92 ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (4.1.9 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ إﻣﺎ ﺑﻨﻈﺎم 24 ﺳﺎﻋﺔ أو 12ﺳﺎﻋﺔ.
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ SIM اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 9.8 أدوات ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت SIM واﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.
أدوات ﻣﺤﻮل اﻟﻮﺣﺪات اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 7.8 اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 8.8 ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ أي ﻗﻴﺎس إﻟﻰ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﻬﺎ. ﻫﻨﺎك 7أﻧﻮاع ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ إﻟﻰ وﺣﺪات: اﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ ,ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ,اﻟﻄﻮل ,اﻟﻮزن ,درﺟﺔ اﻟﺤﺮارة, ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت ,ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﻀﻮء. ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﻨﺘﺶ ) (GMTوﺗﻮﻗﻴﺘﺎت اﻟﻤﺪن اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﻮل اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎر/ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ وﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ[. .1ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ أﺣﺪ أﻧﻮاع اﻟﻮﺣﺪات اﻷرﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[.
ﻣﺬﻛﺮة اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 5.8 ﺳﺎﻋﺔ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 6.8 .1ﺣﺪد اﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮة ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[. .1اﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺑﺪء[ ﻟﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﻮﻗﺖ وﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺪاﺧﻞ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ]ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ[. .2إ ذا ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻓﺎرﻏﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮة ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺟﺪﻳﺪ[. .2اﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺗﻮﻗﻒ[ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺪاﺧﻞ. .3أ دﺧﻞ اﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮة ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺧﻴﺎرات[<]ﺣﻔﻆ[. .3اﺿﻐﻂ ]إﻋﺎدة ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ[ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ.
أدوات xﺣﺬف اﻟﻜﻞ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺣﺬف ﻛﺎﻓﺔ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ SMSاﻟﻤﺠﺪوﻟﺔ وﺟﺪوﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ. ﻋﻨﺪ دﺧﻮﻟﻚ إﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ،ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ. اﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ وﺣﺪد ﺧﻴﺎر ﺟﺪوﻟﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ SMSﺟﺪﻳﺪة. .1ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﺪوﻟﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ SMSﺟﺪﻳﺪة .2ﺣﺪد ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟـ »ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ« ﺟﺪوﻟﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ. .3أدﺧﻞ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ واﻟﻮﻗﺖ ورﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ واﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ. .4ﺣﺪد ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ أو ﻣﻔﺘﺎح »ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ« ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻆ. اﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 4.
ﺟﺪوﻟﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻴﺰة ﺟﺪوﻟﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮة ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ إرﺳﺎل »رﺳﺎﻟﺔ SMS ﻣﺠﺪوﻟﺔ« ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ واﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ اﻟﻤﺠﺪوﻟﻴﻦ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ اﻟﺠﺪوﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ واﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ،ﻳﺒﺪأ إرﺳﺎل رﺳﺎﻟﺔ SMSﻣﺠﺪوﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ،ﻓﺘﺮﺳﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﻤﺤﺪد ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً. ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ،اﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎرات[ ،وﺣﺪد ﻛﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺠﺪاول ،ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: xﻋﺮض ﻳﻌﺮض ﻛﺎﻓﺔ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ SMSاﻟﻤﺠﺪوﻟﺔ وﺟﺪول اﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ.
أدوات ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻤﻨﻈﻢ ،اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎرات[ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻨﺤﻮ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ: xﻋﺮض ﻋﺮض اﻟﺠﺪاول واﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮات ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﻴﻮم اﻟﻤﺤ ّﺪد. اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ qو rﻟﻠﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺧﻼل ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎت .إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض رﻣﺰ اﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ. إذا ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ،ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ].
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺪق ﻓﻲ وﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪد. .1ﺣﺪد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وأدﺧﻞ وﻗﺖ إﻃﻼق اﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪه. .2ﺣﺪد ﻓﺘﺮة اﻟﺘﻜﺮار :ﻣﺮة ,ﻛﻞ ﻳﻮم ,اﻹﺛﻨﻴﻦ- اﻟﺴﺒﺖ ,اﻹﺛﻨﻴﻦ-اﻟﺠﻤﻌﺔ. .3ﺣﺪد ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ[. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ. ﺗﻮﺟﺪ أﻗﺴﺎم ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ أﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ أﻳﻀﺎً ﻓﻲ أﺳﻔﻞ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ أﻗﺴﺎم ﻟﻠﺮﻣﻮز )ﺟﺪول اﻟﻤﻬﺎم ،ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ( .ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ اﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ وﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻬﺬا اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ.
أدوات ﻟﺪى اﻟﺪﺧﻮل إﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ »ﺗﻌﻘﺐ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮل اﻟﻤﻔﻘﻮد« ،ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮار ﻟﺮﻣﺰ ،LMTﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ إدﺧﺎل رﻣﺰ ﻣﺼﺎدق ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮل إﻟﻰ ﺧﻴﺎرات .LMT ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ xرﻣﺰ LMTاﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ».«0000 إ ّن »اﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﻤﻔﻘﻮد« ﻫﻲ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ اﺳﻤﻚ وﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ أرﻗﺎم ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ،ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ إرﺳﺎل رﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮل اﻟﻤﻔﻘﻮد إﻟﻴﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎل ﺗﻤﺖ ﺳﺮﻗﺘﻪ )أرﻗﺎم ﻫﺎﺗﻒ أﺻﺪﻗﺎﺋﻚ أو أﻓﺮاد ﻋﺎﺋﻠﺘﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل( ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام :ﺗﻌﻘﺐ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮل اﻟﻤﻔﻘﻮد .1اذﻫﺐ إﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ »أدوات«.
أدوات إن ﻣﻴﺰة LMTﻓﻲ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﻟﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎم ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﻟﻤﻜﺎن ﺗﻮاﺟﺪ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ اﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮل ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎل ﻓﻘﺪﺗﻪ أو وﺿﻌﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ.ﻓﻲ اﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ اﻟﺬي ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺮح ﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ،ﻳﺘﻢ إرﺳﺎل رﺳﺎﻟﺔ SMSﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ إﻟﻰ رﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﺪد ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً.ﻳﺘﻢ إرﺳﺎل رﺳﺎﻟﺔ SMSإﻟﻰ اﻷرﻗﺎم اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻣﻦ دون ﻋﻠﻢ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺼﺮح ﺑﻪ. ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (1.1.8 .1اذﻫﺐ اﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻدوات .1اذﻫﺐ اﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻدوات .2ﺣﺪد »ﺗﻌﻘﺐ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮل اﻟﻤﻔﻘﻮد« .
اﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ xﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ إﻟﻰ ﻗﺮص ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺزاﻟﺔ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة رﺳﺎﻟﺔ »اﻟﻨﻘﻞ« ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻨﻲ أن وﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ذات ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮة ﺗﻌﻤﻞ وأﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت .أﺛﻨﺎء »اﻟﻨﻘﻞ« ،ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ اﻟﻜﺒﻞ .إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ اﻟﻜﺒﻞ أﺛﻨﺎء »اﻟﻨﻘﻞ« ،ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪان اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت أو ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ وﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ أن ﻗﺪ ﺗﻠﺤﻖ ﺿﺮرا ً ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. اﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ xإذا اﺳﺘﻠﻤﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻛﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ذات ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮة ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ رﻓﺾ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ،وﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ إزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ رؤﻳﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻟﻢ ﻳُﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ.
ﻳﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﻄﺮاز KE970ﻛﺠﻬﺎز ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ذي ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮة .إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ،USBﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻘﺮص اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺزاﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت MP3واﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮاﻓﻴﺔ وﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ واﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ وﻣﺎ إﻟﻰ ذﻟﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻫﺬا اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﻟﺬي ﻳﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮة ﻣﻦ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .ﺟﺮب ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USB وﺳﺘﺠﺪ أن اﻷﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻰ اﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ. xﻻ ﺗﻨﺰع اﻟﻜﺒﻞ أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت ،ﻋﻠﻴﻚ اﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮق »إزاﻟﺔ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة ﺑﺄﻣﺎن« ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺛﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﻜﺒﻞ.
اﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ اﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ xﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إرﺳﺎل اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت واﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪي اﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ واﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ أي ﻧﻮع ﻣﻠﻔﺎت إﻟﻰ »أﺧﺮى« .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻼم اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻠﺪات ﺻﻮر ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮاﻓﻴﺔ، وأﺻﻮات ،وﺻﻮر .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺮض أو ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ »أﺧﺮى« إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ أﻧﻮاع اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪة .ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ USBﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻴﺔ :اﻟﺼﻮر ،واﻷﺻﻮات ،وﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ،وأﺧﺮى .
ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت :ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ. xﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ :ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. xﺣﺬف ﻣﺘﻌﺪد :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ ﻋﺪد ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة. xﺣﺬف اﻟﻜﻞ :ﻟﺤﺬف ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ) txtو pptو pdfو docو.(excel ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. xﻋﺮض :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪات ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح »ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ« أو ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ »ﻋﺮض« ﺿﻤﻦ ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺧﻴﺎرات. xﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت :ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ. آﺧﺮى اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 5.
اﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 3.7 ﻳﻘﻮم ﺑﻌﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت 3GPو 3G2ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ/ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة .أﻧﻮاع اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪة ﻓﻘﻂ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت 3gp.اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ MPEG4وﺑﺮاﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮي h.263 وﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ .AMR ﻧﻘﻞ إﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ :ﻧﻘﻞ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ اﻟﻤﺤﺪد إﻟﻰاﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ. xﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >>ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ<< أو ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ >>ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ<< ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺧﻴﺎرات.
ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻴﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ،ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆدي ﻫﺬا اﻷﻣﺮ إﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺧﻄﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت :ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ. xاﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث :ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إرﺳﺎل ﻣﻌﻈﻢ اﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﺘﻲ اﻟﺘﻘﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا وﺣﻤﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ .WAPإﻟﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ّ ﺧﻼل ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث. xﻋﺮض ﺷﺮاﺋﺢ :ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﻔﻈﺘﻬﺎ ﻛﻌﺮض ﺷﺮاﺋﺢ. xﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ :ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. xﺣﺬف اﻟﻜﻞ :ﻟﺤﺬف ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. xﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻮع اﻟﻌﺮض.
اﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1.7 إﻇﻬﺎر ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت JPGﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ\اﻟﺼﻮر ﻓﻲ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة. xﻋﺮض :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ JPGﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح » ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ « أو ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ » ﻋﺮض « ﺿﻤﻦ ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺧﻴﺎرات. xﺣﺬف :ﻟﺤﺬف اﻟﻤﻠﻒ. xﺿﺒﻂ ﻛـ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ :ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺼﻮرةاﻟﻤﺤﺪدة ﺣﺎﻟ ًﻴﺎ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ. ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ أﻓﻘﻴﺔ :ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرةاﻟﻤﺤﺪدة ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻋﻤﻮدﻳﺎ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ. اﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻌ ّﺮف اﻟﺼﻮرة :ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرةاﻟﻤﺤﺪدة ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻛﻤﻌ ّﺮف اﻟﺼﻮرة.
.1اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر. ]اﻷﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ .2اﻧﺘﻘﻞ إﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪد ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[. xﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻄﻠﺐ داﺋﻤﺎً أو ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMأو اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ xﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﻌﺮض ﻣ ّﺮر ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﻌﺮض ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[. اﻻﺳﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ :ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮضاﻻﺳﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ. ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻮرة :ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒﺑﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﺮوف واﻟﺼﻮر.
ﺟﻬﺎت اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 4.6 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﻋﺪاد ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺄﻋﻀﺎء ﻣﺤﺪدﻳﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ .ﺛﻤﺔ 7ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ إﻋﺪاد ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺎت ﻟﻬﺎ. xﻋﺮض اﻷﻋﻀﺎء :ﺗﻌﺮض أﻋﻀﺎء اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ. xﻧﻐﻤﺔ رﻧﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ :ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ رﻧﻴﻦ ﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت أﻋﻀﺎء اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ. xأ ﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ :ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ. xإ ﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻀﻮ :ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ أﻋﻀﺎء ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ. ﺟﻬﺎت اﻻﺗﺼﺎل xﺣﺬف ﻋﻀﻮ :ﻹزاﻟﺔ ﻋﻀﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ أﻋﻀﺎء اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ،إﻻ أن اﻻﺳﻢ واﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻳﻈﻼن ﻓﻲ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻲ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺳﻌﺔ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺼﻞ إﻟﻰ 1000إدﺧﺎل .ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺳﻌﺔ ذاﻛﺮة ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰود اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ .ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻋﺪد اﻷﺣﺮف ﻣﻴﺰة ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SIM ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ xﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ اﻟﺤﺪ اﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻸﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ وﻃﻮل اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮع ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SIM .1ﺣﺪد ﺟﻬﺔ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[. .2أدﺧﻞ اﺳﻤﺎً. .3اﺿﻐﻂ rﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ رﻗﻤﺎً. .4ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻺدﺧﺎل ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ، ﻋﻠﻰ . .
ﺟﻬﺎت اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺤﺚ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1.6 .1ﺣ ّﺪد ﺑﺤﺚ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[. .2أدﺧﻞ اﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ xﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ اﻟﻔﻮري ﻋﺒﺮ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﺤﺮف اﻷول ﻣﻦ اﻻﺳﻢ. .3إ ذا ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ إدﺧﺎل أو ﺣﺬﻓﻪ أو ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎرات[. ﺟﻬﺎت اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. 72 xاﻟﻌﺮض :ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ أو اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﺬي اﺧﺘﺮﺗﻪ. xﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ :ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ اﻻﺳﻢ أو اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ.
ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﻠﻢ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ أو ﻋﺪم ﺗﺴﻠﻤﻬﺎ. ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎ ت )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (6.0.5 xاﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل ﻧﻌﻢ :إذا ﺣﺪدت ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ. ﻻ :اذا ﺣﺪدت ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺑﻌﺪ ذﻟﻚ. ﻻ :ﻟﻦ ﻳﺼﺪر اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ إﺷﺎرة ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ أرﻗﺎم رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت. xاﻟﻠﻐﺎت ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ .ﺑﻌﺪ ذﻟﻚ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪدﺗﻬﺎ.
اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ رﻗﻢ اﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ اﻟﺼﺎدر :أدﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮان SMTP ورﻗﻢ اﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ اﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﻳﺪك اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ. ﻣﺼﺎدﻗﺔ اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﺎدر :ﻋﻨﺪ إرﺳﺎل اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ، ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﺼﺎدﻗﺔ أم ﻻ. ﻣﻌ ّﺮف/ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮور ﻣﻠﻘﻢ اﻟﺼﺎدر :أدﺧﻞ اﻟﻤﻌ ّﺮف وﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺮور ﻹرﺳﺎل ﺑﺮﻳﺪك اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ. • ﺣﺴﺎب ﺟﺪﻳﺪ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﻋﺪاد ﺣﺘﻰ 5 ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎت ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺤﺴﺎب اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ .ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﻋﺪاد اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • ﺣﺬف :ﻟﺤﺬف اﻟﺤﺴﺎب اﻟﻤﺤﺪد ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
xﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺣﺴﺎب ﺑﺮﻳﺪ إﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ أو ﺣﺬﻓﻪ أو إﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ. • اﻟﻌﺮض :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ رؤﻳﺔ اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ. • ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ • ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ اﺳﻢ اﻟﺤﺴﺎب :اﺳﻢ اﻟﺤﺴﺎب. ﻋﻨﻮان اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ :أدﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮان اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ اﻟﺬي أﻋﻄﺎه ﻟﻚ ﻣﺰود اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ. اﺳﻤﻲ :أدﺧﻞ اﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪم. ﻣﻠﻘﻢ اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﻮارد :أدﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮان POP3 ورﻗﻢ اﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ اﻟﻠﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺘﻠﻘﺎﻫﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﻳﺪك اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ. اﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم :أدﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﺮف اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻚ.
اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ة )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (2.0.5 xاﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮع :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إدﺧﺎل ﻣﻮﺿﻮع رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. xﻣﺪة اﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ :ﻋﺮض ﻣﺪة ﻛﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ. xاﻷوﻟﻮﻳﺔ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻷوﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎرﻫﺎ. xﻓﺘﺮة اﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺔ :ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻫﺬه ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺪة ﺣﻔﻆ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ. xﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ :إذا ﺗﻢ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ إذا ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎن ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ إرﺳﺎل رﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﺑﻨﺠﺎح ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻣﻪ.
xإ ﻧﻬﺎء :ﻳﺄﺧﺬك ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ إﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ. اﻹﻋﺪادات رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 0.5 )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (1.0.5 xأ ﻧﻮاع اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ: ﻧﺺ وﺻﻮت وﻓﺎﻛﺲ واﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﻣﺤﻠﻲ و X400 وﺑﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ و ERMES ﻋﺎدة ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻧﻮع اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ إﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎت أﺧﺮى .اﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺰود اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪى ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ. xﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ :إذا ﺿﺒﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻌﻢ، ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ إذا ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎن ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ إرﺳﺎل رﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﺑﻨﺠﺎح ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻣﻪ.
اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ xإرﺳﺎل ﻋﺒﺮ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ :اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻹرﺳﺎلرﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻨﻤﻮذج اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة ﻋﺒﺮ SMS رﺳﺎﻟﺔ وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة :اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬااﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻹرﺳﺎل رﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻨﻤﻮذج اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة ﻋﺒﺮ MMS ﺑﺮﻳﺪ إﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ :ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺣﺴﺎب ﺑﺮﻳﺪ إﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ أو ﺣﺬﻓﻪ أو إﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ. xﺣﺬف :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﺑﺤﺬف اﻟﻨﻤﻮذج. xﻧﻤﻮذج ﺟﺪﻳﺪ :اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻤﻮذج ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ xﺣﺬف اﻟﻜﻞ :ﻟﺤﺬف ﻛﻞ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة. 66 اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪد ة )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (2.9.
.1ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت وﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ »ﻗﺮاءة« ﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﺮاءة رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ، أﺧﺮى ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ أو ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ]اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ[ . .2ﺗﻈﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻟﺤﻴﻦ اﺳﺘﻼم رﺳﺎﻟﺔ أﺧﺮى. اﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎ ت )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (2.8.5 )ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬا ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ واﻻﺷﺘﺮاك( xﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض أرﻗﺎم رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ أﺿﻔﺘﻬﺎ .ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺧﻴﺎرات[ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ وﺣﺬف ﻓﺌﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ أﺿﻔﺘﻬﺎ.
اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 6.5 ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ إرﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ. اﺳﺘﻤﻊ إﻟﻰ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 7.5 ﺑﻤﺠﺮد ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎع إﻟﻰ أﻳﻀﺎ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻓﻲ اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎع إﻟﻰ اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ 64 xﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ ﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ،ﻳﻌﺮض اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ و ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮت ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ.
ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﺟﺮاء ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة اﻷﻛﺜﺮ اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﺎً .ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﺧﻼل اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ وﻷﺳﻔﻞ. ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺷﻚ أن ﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ و ﺷﻜﻞ إرﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ أو ﻓﺸﻞ إرﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ. ﺑﻌﺪ إرﺳﺎل اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻨﺠﺎح ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ إﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺼﺎدر. وﻛﻞ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﻮدة ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. xﻋﺮض :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ. xﻋﺮض :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة. xإ رﺳﺎل :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إرﺳﺎل اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ .
اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ xﻋﺮض :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ. xﺣﺬف ﻛﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻤﻘﺮوءة :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬف ﻛﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻤﻘﺮوءة. xرد :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ. xﺣﺬف اﻟﻜﻞ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬف ﻛﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ. xﺣﺬف :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬف اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ. xاﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻜﻞ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ اﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﻴﻦ. xﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة إﻟﻰ ﺷﺨﺺ آﺧﺮ. xإﻋﺎدة اﻻﺗﺼﺎل :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﻋﺎدة اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ.
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻼم اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ .وﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﻮارد .وﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﻮارد، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل إرﺷﺎدات اﻟﺮﻣﻮز. إذا ﻋﺮض اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ”ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ،“SIMﻳﺠﺐ ﺣﺬف ﺑﻌﺾ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ SIMﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﻮارد .وإذا ﻋﺮض اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ”ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ“ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮدع ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﺣﺬف اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ و اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ و اﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت. * رﺳﺎﻟﺔ SIM ﺗﻌﻨﻲ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ SIMاﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﺑﺸﻜﻞ اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ.
اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ xاﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ :ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺘﻢ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ. xﺣﻔﻆ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﻮدات :ﺣﺪد ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻟﺤﻔﻆ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﻮدات. xﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮع :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮع. xﻟﻐﺎت :T9ﺣﺪد ﻟﻐﺔ وﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎل T9ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ أﻳﻀﺎ إﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎل T9ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ً ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ .T9 xﺟﺪﻳﺪة T9ﻛﻠﻤﺔ :ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ T9اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة ﻹدﺧﺎل اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮس. xﻣﺴﺢ اﻟﻨﺺ :ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ إزاﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ.
ﻹرﺳﺎل/اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ إﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ ،ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ إﻋﺪاد ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ. .1ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إدﺧﺎل ﺣﺘﻰ 20ﻋﻨﻮاﻧﺎً ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺤﻘﻞ اﻟﺨﺎص ب ”إﻟﻰ“ و ”ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻛﺮﺑﻮﻧﻴﺔ“. ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ :ﻹدﺧﺎل @ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ” وﺣﺪد @. “ .2ادﺧﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع رﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ. .3ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ ،اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎرات[. ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. xاﻹرﺳﺎل إﻟﻰ :ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ.
اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ xإ رﺳﺎل :ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ إرﺳﺎل رﺳﺎﺋﻞ وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة ﻟﻌﺪة ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ وﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺄوﻟﻮﻳﺔ ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إرﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻻﺣﻘﺎً. xإ دراج :ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ رﻣﺰ/ﺻﻮرة/ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ/ ﺻﻮت/ﺻﻮرة ﺟﺪﻳﺪة/ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ /ﺻﻮت ﺟﺪﻳﺪ/ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة /ﻧﻤﻮذج ﻧﺺ /ﺟﻬﺔ اﺗﺼﺎل/ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ وﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ xﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ آﻟ ًﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺼﺎدر ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺸﻞ اﻹرﺳﺎل. اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ xﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ.
ﻧﻤﺎذج ﻧﺼﻴﺔ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻨﻤﺎذجاﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ أرﻗﺎماﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أو ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ دﻓﺘﺮ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ. اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ اﻟﻰاﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ. xﺣﻔﻆ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﻮدات :ﻟﺤﻔﻆ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﻮدات. xﻟﻐﺎت :T9ﺣﺪد ﻟﻐﺔ وﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎل T9ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ أﻳﻀﺎ إﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎل T9ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ً ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ .T9 xﺟﺪﻳﺪة T9ﻛﻠﻤﺔ :ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ T9اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة ﻹدﺧﺎل اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮس.
اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1.5 ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ب SMS )ﺧﺪﻣﺎت اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮة( و ) MMSﺧﺪﻣﺔ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة( واﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ وﻛﺬﻟﻚ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. اﻟﻨﺺ )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (1.1.5 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ وﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ. .1إذﻫﺐ اﻟﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ].[OK اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ .1أدﺧﻞ رﻗﻢ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ. .2اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ. rﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ .3ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ أرﻗﺎم اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎت اﻻﺗﺼﺎل. .
ﻋﺮض ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 6.4 ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ آﺧﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ وﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت واﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ اﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ وإﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ .ﻹﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺳ ُﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ إدﺧﺎل رﻣﺰ .PIN2 ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 7.4 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻘﺪار اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل .GPRS اﻟﺴﺠﻞ إﺿﺎﻓ ًﺔ إﻟﻰ ذﻟﻚ ،ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻢ ﻣﻀﻰ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ وأﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ.
اﻟﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت واردة اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 4.4 ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻋﺮض آﺧﺮ 50ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت واردة .ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻘﻴﺎم ﺑﺎﻵﺗﻲ: xﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ وﺟﻮده واﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ أو ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻲ دﻓﺘﺮ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ xإ دﺧﺎل اﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺮﻗﻢ وﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻲ دﻓﺘﺮ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ xإ رﺳﺎل رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻬﺬا اﻟﺮﻗﻢ xﺣﺬف اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺪة اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 5.4 ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻋﺮض ﻣﺪة اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻮاردة واﻟﺼﺎدرة .وﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ إﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﺎت اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت.
اﻟﺴﺠﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ اﻟﺴﺠﻞ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ واﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻮاردة واﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ دﻋﻢ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ) (CLIداﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎق اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ. ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﻗﻢ واﻻﺳﻢ )إن وﺟﺪ( ﻣﻊ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ ووﻗﺖ إﺟﺮاء اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﺮض أوﻗﺎت اﻻﺗﺼﺎل. ﻛﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1.4 ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻋﺮض ﻛﻞ ﺳﺠﻼت اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ. ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 2.4 ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻋﺮض آﺧﺮ 50ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻟﻢ ﻳُﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ .
اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ [ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر xاﻟﻮﺿﻊ ] ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻹرﺳﺎل ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺒﺮ MMSأو »ﻋﺎم« .ﻋﺎم [ :اﻟﺤﺠﻢ :ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ xاﻟﺪﻗﺔ ] إﺣﺪى درﺟﺘﻲ اﻟﺪﻗﺔ اﻵﺗﻴﺘﻴﻦ 128x96و 176x144 ﻣﺴﺠﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 4.3 ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ .ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ]اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات[ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. xﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أو اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻴﺔ.
xﻣﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ] [ :ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ وﻗﺖ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ اﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎط واﻹﻋﺪادات ﺛﻮان و 5ﺛﻮان و اﻟﻤﺘﻮاﻓﺮة ﻫﻲ )إﻳﻘﺎف و ٍ 3 ﺛﻮان( .ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻂ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﺑﻌﺪ وﻗﺖ ٍ 10 اﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺤﺪد. xﺣﻔﻆ ﻓﻲ ] [ :ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻤﻜﺎن ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﺻﻮرة) .ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ/ﻫﺎﺗﻒ( xﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة ] [ :ﻳﺘﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﻟﻘﻄﺎت ﻋﺪﻳﺪة ﻟﺼﻮر ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ. xاﻟﻘﻴﺎس ] [ :ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻹﺿﺎءة اﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰة ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺰء ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﻲء .ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻮﺳﻂ واﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءة ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ • ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﺻﻮرة .1اﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ اﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ زر اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا .ﺳﺘﺠﻬﺰ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ وﻗﺪ ﺗﻮد ﺗﺪوﻳﺮ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﺎﻣﻮدي. .2اﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆرة اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻬﺪف اﻟﻤﺮاد ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮه ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﺻﻮرة ،ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح . ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﺻﻮر واﺿﺤﺔ ،اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮاأﺛﻨﺎء ﺣﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا دون أي ﺣﺮﻛﺔ. .3إذا ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ،ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح . ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦاﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﺻﻮرة ﻟﻪ )أﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ 50ﺳﻢ(.
ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﺣﺪة اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا اﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﺻﻮر ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎص أو ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ .ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ إﻟﻰ ذﻟﻚ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إرﺳﺎل اﻟﺼﻮر إﻟﻰ أﺷﺨﺎص آﺧﺮﻳﻦ واﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺼﻮر ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ. 3 أﻟﺒﻮم ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ xﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا ،ﻳﺰداد اﺳﺘﻬﻼك ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ .إذا ﻇﻬﺮ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ،إﺷﺎرة إﻟﻰ اﻧﺨﻔﺎض ﻃﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎدة ﺷﺤﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام. 12 ﺧﻴﺎرات 2/1ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ 3اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا ﻳﺼﺪر ﺻﻮت اﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ أو ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺻﻮت ﻋﻨﺪ اي اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ذﻟﻚ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ .
اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ xاﻹﻋﺪادات اﻛﻮﻟﻴﺰر :ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮات ﻋﻨﺪ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎع ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ. وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂوﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ »ﺗﻜﺮار واﺣﺪ«» ،ﺗﻜﺮار اﻟﻜﻞ«» ،ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻜﻞ«. ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻲ :إذا ﺣﺪدت ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚاﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎع ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻲ. اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺼﺮي :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮاﻟﻤﺮﺋﻲ :ﻧﻮر وارﺗﺪاد وﻋﺎزف اﻟﻘﻴﺜﺎرة .ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCD اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ .
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ اﻻﻛﻮﻟﻴﺰر اﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ رﺟﻮع ﺧﻴﺎرات .1ا ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪد ﻣﺸﻐﻞ .MP3 .2ا ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎرات[ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻜﺮار ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻜﻞ ﺗﻜﺮار اﻟﻜﻞ ﺗﻜﺮار واﺣﺪ xﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ :ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ MP3ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً. xﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ آﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .MP3 xﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ رﻧﻴﻦ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ رﻧﻴﻦ أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ .
اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ اﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ: • MPEG-2.5 Layer III ،MPEG-2 :Layer II I ﺗﺮدد اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ 8ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ إﻟﻰ 48 ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ،ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﺒﺖ ﺣﺘﻰ 320ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ/ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،اﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ. • :AACﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎت ADIFو ) ADTSﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺮدد ﺗﺼﻞ إﻟﻰ 48ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(.
اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ xﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻣﺆﺷﺮ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﻰ اﻧﺘﻬﺎء اﻟﺸﺤﻦ .رﺑﻤﺎ ﻻﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا او وﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة. xﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة ،ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺗﻜﻮن ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮة وﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮة. ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ KE970ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ MP3 ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎع إﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت MP3اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ رأس ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ أو ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮت داﺧﻠﻲ.
اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ xﺣﺬف اﻟﻜﻞ :ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻤﻴﺰة ﺑﺤﺬف ﻛﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. xإﻋﺎدة ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ اﻟﻜﻞ :ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر إﻋﺎدة ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ اﻷﻧﻤﺎط ﻛﺎﻓﺔ. اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (2.5.2 ﻛﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت أو اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ اﻃﻠﻌﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ xاﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻫﻲ ذاﻛﺮة ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ. اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻻرﺗﺒﺎط 44 )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ( 3.5.2 ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ وﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ أم ﻻ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪه .ﺑﻌﺪ إدﺧﺎل ﻋﻨﻮان URLﻣﺤﺪد ،اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ”ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ“. ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎت اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 4.2 ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺎت اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮاض اﻷﺧﻴﺮة. اﻹﻋﺪادات اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 5.2 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ واﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ وﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻻرﺗﺒﺎط واﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ اﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ. ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ أوﺿﺎع اﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻠﻴﻦ ،وﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .ﺗﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞ إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ اﻷوﺿﺎع اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ.
اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ xوﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ WAP ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼف ﻧﺴﺨﺔ اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻚ. اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1.2 ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ .ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮن اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪه ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻨﺸﻂ .ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺰود اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ إذا ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ أﺣﺪ اﻷوﺿﺎع. اﺷﺎرات ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 2.2 اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ URL ﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺗﻚ اﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ وذﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ اﻟﺪﺧﻮل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ وﻗﺖ ﻻﺣﻖ. 42 ﻹﻧﺸﺎء إﺷﺎرة ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ .
اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮاﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت WAPواﻷﺳﻌﺎر واﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎت ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻚ أو ﻣﺰود اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺧﺪﻣﺘﻪ. ﺳﻮف ﻳﻌﻄﻴﻚ أﻳﻀﺎً ﻣﺰودي اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ إرﺷﺎدات ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﻢ. ﻳﺮﺟﻰ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻚ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻚ .ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮض وﻳﺐ ،ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﺗﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ رﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺧﻴﺎرات ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ. ﺑﻤﺠﺮد إﺗﻤﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮى ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰود اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ.
اﻷوﺿﺎع xﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮت اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ :ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮت اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام. xﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻘﺔ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام. xدرﺟﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ :ﺿﺒﻂ درﺟﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ. xدرﺟﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ/اﻹﻳﻘﺎف :ﺿﺒﻂ درﺟﺔ ﺻﻮت ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺠﻮال xرد ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ :ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻣﻮﺻﻼً ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺮأس أو ﻃﻘﻢ ﺣﺮ اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ. • إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﻟﻦ ﻳﺮد اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً.
اﻷوﺿﺎع ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻛﻞ وﺿﻊ .اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[ وﺣﺪد ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ/ﻷﺳﻔﻞ. ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ )اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (x1.x.1 .1ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻷوﺿﺎع. .2ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ »اﻷوﺿﺎع« ،اﻧﺘﻘﻞ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[ أو ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ”ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ“. .3ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪد ”ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ“. اﻧﺘﻘﻞ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”اﻷوﺿﺎع“. ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ أو ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ”ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ“ ،ﺣﺪد ”ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ“ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺧﻴﺎر ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ .
ﺳﺮد ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ .7اﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ 1.7اﻟﺼﻮر 2.7أﺻﻮات 3.7ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ 4.7ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪات 5.7آﺧﺮى 6.7اﻻﻟﻌﺎب واﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت 7.7اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻴﺔ .8أدوات 1.8ﺗﻌﻘﺐ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮل اﻟﻤﻔﻘﻮد 2.8ﺳﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ 3.8اﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ 4.8اﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ 5.8ﻣﺬﻛﺮة 6.8ﺳﺎﻋﺔ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف 7.8ﻣﺤﻮل اﻟﻮﺣﺪات 8.8اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺳﺮد ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ 9.8ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ SIM 38 .9اﻻﻋﺪادات 1.9اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ واﻟﻮﻗﺖ 2.9اﻟﻠﻐﺔ 3.9اﻟﻌﺮض 4.9اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ 5.9اﻋﺪادات اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ 6.
1.6ﺑﺤﺚ 1.4ﻛﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت 1.5رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة 2.4ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ 2.5ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﻮارد 2.6ﺟﻬﺔ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺟﺪﻳﺪة 3.4ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﺻﺎدرة 3.5ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﻼﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ 3.6اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ 4.4ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت واردة 4.5ﻣﺴﻮدات 4.6اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت 5.4ﻣﺪة اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ 5.5ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺼﺎدر 5.6ﻧﺴﺦ اﻟﻜﻞ 6.4ﻋﺮض ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ 6.5اﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ 6.6ﺣﺬف اﻟﻜﻞ 7.4ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت 7.5اﺳﺘﻤﻊ إﻟﻰ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ 7.6اﻹﻋﺪادات 8.5ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت 8.
ﺳﺮد ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أن ﺗﻌﺮض ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻴﻦ .اﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﻠﻮب ﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ أو ﺑﺎﺳﻠﻮب ﻋﺮض اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ .اﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻆ أ ّن ارﻗﺎم اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻻﺳﻠﻮﺑﻴﻦ. اﻻﻋﺪاد اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻌﺮض اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﻠﻮب ﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻛﻞ ارﻗﺎم اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﺮض ﻋﻠﻰ اﺳﺎس اﺳﻠﻮب اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﻳﻮﺿﺢ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ واﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺪرج ﺗﺤﺘﻬﺎ: xاﻷرﻗﺎم اﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ xاﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻌﺜﻮر ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ وﺻﻒ اﻟﻤﻴﺰة.
ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ أﺣﺪ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﻲ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ،اﻋﺮض رﻗﻢ اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺘﺤﺪث إﻟﻴﻪ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ .ﺣﺪد اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ »ﺧﺎص« ﻣﻦ »ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ« ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ اﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ. إﻧﻬﺎء اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼل اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﺧﺮاج اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ إﺣﺪى اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح .
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼل اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ إﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ إﺛﻨﺎء إﺟﺮاﺋﻚ ﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ اﻵن .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح . ﻋﻨﺪ إﺟﺮاء اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺗﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻷوﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﺪ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً. ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼل اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻘﺔ ،اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح أو اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎرات[ وﺣﺪد »ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ«»/ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻛﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت«. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ،ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح . ﺳﻴﻈﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮن اﻵﺧﺮون اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻘﻮن ﻣﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ .
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ رﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ واردة دون اﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ وذﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح . أﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ رﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ واردة ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح . ﻛﺘﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ]ﺻﺎﻣﺖ[ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻋﺎدة اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ[ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ ﻛﺘﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت ،اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﻚ ،وﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻧﺖ ﺳﻤﺎع اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ .
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼل اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻣﺰود ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ وﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ أﺛﻨﺎء اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ .ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ أﺛﻨﺎء اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ ،اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎرات[. أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أﺛﻨﺎء اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد ،واﳋﻴﺎرات ﻣﺸﺮوﺣﺔ أدﻧﺎه. ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼل اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ( 32 ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﳊﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ رﻗﻢ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﻠﺒﻪ ﻣﻦ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻹﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ واﻟﺨﻴﺎرات ﺟﻬﺎت اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻻﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎت اﻻﺗﺼﺎل. ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ. ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ واﻟﺨﻴﺎرات ﻳﻮﻓﺮ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ وﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﺮﻏﺒﺎﺗﻚ .ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ رﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ وﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻦ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ .ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻛﻞ و اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﻤﻴﺰة ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ رﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ وﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺮض وﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ.
اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﺿﻊ ) 123وﺿﻊ اﻷرﻗﺎم( ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ وﺿﻊ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻴﺎم ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻓﻲ ﻧﺺ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ )رﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل(. اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ اﻷرﻗﺎم اﻟﻤﺮاد إدﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ وذﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻳﺪوﻳﺎً إﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى. اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﺿﻊ اﻟﺮﻣﻮز اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺮﻣﻮز إدﺧﺎل رﻣﻮز ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة أو ﺣﺮوف ﺧﺎﺻﺔ .ﻹدﺧﺎل رﻣﺰ ،اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح . اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺮﻣﺰ اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[.
ﻣﻦ إﻟﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎم ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻚ. .1ا ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮع واﻟﺬي ﻳﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﺤﺮف اﻟﻤﺮاد ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ: xﺿﻐﻄﺔ واﺣﺪة ﻟﻠﺤﺮف اﻷول xﺿﻐﻄﺘﺎن ﻟﻠﺤﺮف اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ xوﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﺤﻮ .2ﻹدﺧﺎل ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ،اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﻣﺮة واﺣﺪة ﻓﻘﻂ .ﻟﺤﺬف أي ﺣﺮف . ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﺮوف ،اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح اﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻟﻤﺤﻮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ. xﺑﺮﺟﺎء اﻟﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ اﻟﺠﺪول اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﺮوف اﻟﻤﺘﻮاﻓﺮة ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ.
اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎت اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮس .وﺑﻤﺠﺮد إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎت اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة ،ﻓﺈن اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎت اﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺤﺎً ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮس xإ ذا ﻇﻠﺖ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ إﺗﻤﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺮة واﺣﺪة أو ﻣﺮﺗﺎن ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺧﻼل ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى. ﻣﺜﺎل :اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ .Good xﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻟﻐﺔ T9ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ أو اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻫﻮ وﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ.
وﺿﻊ ) ABCاﻟﺤﺮوف( ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﻴﺎم ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل اﻟﺤﺮوف ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮع اﻟﺬي ﻳﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﺤﺮف اﻟﻤﺮاد ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ وذﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﺮة واﺣﺪة ﻓﻘﻂ أو ﻣﺮﺗﺎن أو ﺛﻼث أو أرﺑﻊ ﻣﺮات ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺤﺮف اﻟﻤﺮاد ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. وﺿﻊ ) 123وﺿﻊ اﻷرﻗﺎم( اﻛﺘﺐ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ واﺣﺪة ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ رﻗﻢ ﻳﺮاد ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ.ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎل إﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻣﺪﺧﻼت اﻟﻨﺺ ،اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض وﺿﻊ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض. ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎل أﺣﺮف ﺧﺎﺻﺔ. ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ وﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻨﺺ .
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ xﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ اﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء اﺳﺘﺨﺪام دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ أو أﻳﺔ ﻣﻴﺰة أﺧﺮى ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .إذا ﻛﺎن اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ،USB ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ رﻓﺾ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻮاردة ،وﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺳﺘﺮى إﻃﺎر اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ. ﻗﻮة اﻹﺷﺎرة اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ إذا ﻛﻨﺖ داﺧﻞ أﺣﺪ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻲ ،ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆدي اﻗﺘﺮاﺑﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة إﻟﻰ اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل أﻓﻀﻞ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻗﻮة اﻹﺷﺎرة ) ( اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ.
ﻋﻨﺪ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻚ ،اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻹﻧﻬﺎء. ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻼم )ﺗﻠﻘﻲ( ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ،ﻳﺼﺪر اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ رﻧﻴﻨًﺎ وﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض رﻣﺰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﻮاﻣﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ،إذا ﺗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮف ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ، ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض رﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ )أو اﻻﺳﻢ إذا ﻛﺎن ﻣﺨﺰﻧ ًﺎ ﻓﻲ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ اﻷﺳﻤﺎء وأرﻗﺎم اﻟﻬﻮاﺗﻒ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ SIMﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ إﻟﻰ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﻓﺔ ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ اﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. أو ﻣﻔﺘﺎح .
اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ إﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ .1ﻳﺠﺐ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻴﺪ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل رﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ذﻟﻚ رﻣﺰ اﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ. ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ رﻗﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ،اﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ رﻗﻢ واﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮة. xا ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻟﻤﺤﻮ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ. .3اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ. اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ .4ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ إﻧﻬﺎء اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ،اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح . 24 إﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻹرﺳﺎل ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض آﺧﺮ .
إزاﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة أزل ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻮرة أدﻧﺎه: ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ xﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪة ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻓﻘﻂ. ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ أﻻ ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة واﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪال ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة أو ﺑﺈزاﻟﺘﻬﺎ أﺛﻨﺎء اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أو ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻗﻴﺪ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆدي إﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪان اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت أو إﻟﺤﺎق اﻟﻀﺮر ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ.
اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ إدﺧﺎل ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة • ا ﻧﺰع ﻛﺎﺑﻞ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ واﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﻮاﺻﻒ اﻟﺮﻋﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎدي ﺣﺪوث ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ أو ﺣﺮﻳﻖ. أدﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻓﻲ اﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﺎً، ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻮرة أدﻧﺎه: • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪم ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ اﻷﺷﻴﺎء اﻟﺤﺎدة ﻛﺄﺳﻨﺎن اﻟﺤﻴﻮاﻧﺎت واﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ، ﻓﻬﻨﺎك ﺧﻄﺮ أن ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬا ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ. ﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ، اﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ّ وﻟﻴﺲ اﻟﺴﻠﻚ.
ﺷﺤﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ اﻟﻰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ،ﻳﺠﺐ اوﻻ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ. .4ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ أﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻦ اﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻛﺘﻤﺎل ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺸﺤﻦ. ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ • إ ذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﻏﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ، ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCD ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮاﻟﻰ دﻗﻴﻘﺔ إﻟﻰ دﻗﻴﻘﺔ وﻧﺼﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ اﻟﺴﻔﺮ. .2ﻣﻊ اﻟﺤﻔﺎظ ﻋﻠﻴﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮاﺟﻬﺘﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ ،ادﻓﻊ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻤﻬﺎﻳﻰء اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ داﺧﻞ اﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﻤﺎع ﺻﻮت ﺗﻜﺔ اﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ. .
اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ xﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﺨﺪش. اﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺟﻴ ًﺪا ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMأﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ .اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SIM ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ • ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪال ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMأو ﺑﺈزاﻟﺘﻬﺎ أﺛﻨﺎء اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أو ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻗﻴﺪ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆدي إﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪان اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت أو إﻟﺤﺎق اﻟﻀﺮر ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SIM 20 .3إدﺧﺎل اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﺮﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻲ اﻟﻘﻄﻊ اﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ وﺳﻂ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ.
اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ،ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﺰع ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMأو اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ. .1إزاﻟﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ. اﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ وﺣﺮك اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ وأﻧﺰع اﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻋﻨﻬﺎ .اﻗﻠﺐ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ رأﺳﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻘﺐ ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ،ﺛﻢ ارﻓﻊ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺒﻌﻴﻚ وأﺧﺮﺟﻬﺎ. xﻗﺪ ﺗﺆدي إزاﻟﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ وﻫﻮ ّ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ إﻟﻰ ﺳﻮء ﻋﻤﻠﻪ. .2إدﺧﺎل ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SIM أدﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMداﺧﻞ اﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SIMﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ إدﺧﺎل ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIM اﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
* ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﻤﺤﺎدﺛﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن ﻗﻮة اﻹﺷﺎرة أﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻃﺘﻴﻦ ،ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻘﻄﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت وﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ وﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﺼﻮت ردﻳﺌًﺎ. ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ اﻋﺘﺒﺎر أﺷﺮﻃﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮًا ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت .ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪم وﺟﻮد أﺷﺮﻃﺔ، ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ذﻟﻚ ﻋﺪم وﺟﻮد ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ: وﻓﻲ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﺴﻨﻰ ﻟﻚ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ )اﻻﺗﺼﺎل واﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ وﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(. اﻟﺮﻣﺰ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺎم. اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳋﺎرﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻨﻤﻂ. ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ.
ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﻨﺺ واﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎت ﺟﻬﺎت اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ إﺷﺎرات ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺮﻣﺰ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ اﻟﺴﻄﺮ اﻷول ﻳﻌﺮض ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﺮﻣﻮز. اﻷﺳﻄﺮ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻳﻌﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ واﻹرﺷﺎدات وأﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ،ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ. اﻟﺴﻄﺮ اﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻳﻌﺮض اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر. اﻟﺮﻣﻮز اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ ﻗﻮة إﺷﺎرة اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ*. ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ وﺟﻮد ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺟﺎرﻳﺔ. ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ .GPRS ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻟﻚ أﻧﻚ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺘﺠﻮال.
ﻣﻴﺰات KE970 ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIM ﻣﺎﺳﻚ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﻹزاﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻏﻄﺎء اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻓﻼش ﻣﻴﺰات KE970 ﻋﺪﺳﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا 16 اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ أﻃﺮاف اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ xﻳﺮﺟﻰ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ وأﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺴﻜﻮن ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ .USB اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ xﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر )ﻣﻔﺘﻮح( :ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ xﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر )ﻣﻐﻠﻖ( :ﺿﻐﻂ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ -ﺗﻀﻲء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .LCD xأ ﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ :ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻷذن ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ xﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺴﻤﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ اﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻓﺎن ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت ﻫﻮ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮي اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ. ﻣﻔﺘﺎحMP3 ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ MP3ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮةً.
ﻣﻴﺰات KE970 ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ااﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺗﺆدي ﻫﺬه اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻹرﺳﺎل xاﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ واﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت. xﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر :ﻳﻌﺮض آﺧﺮ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺼﺎدرة واﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ و اﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ. ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻣﻴﺰات KE970 ﺣﺬف ﺣﺮف واﺣﺪ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ .اﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮار اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ اﻹدﺧﺎﻻت .اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ. 14 ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻹﻧﻬﺎء xاﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ/إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮار( xإﻧﻬﺎء اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت أو رﻓﻀﻬﺎ.
ﻣﻴﺰات KE970 أﺟﺰاء اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أﺟﺰاء اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ LCD ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻷذن xأ ﻋﻠﻰ :ﻗﻮة اﻹﺷﺎرة وﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ووﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﺪﻳﺪة xﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر: ﻟﻔﺘﺮة وﺟﻴﺰة :q :ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮة وﺟﻴﺰة :rﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻷوﺿﺎع اﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻔﺘﺮة ﻗﺼﻴﺮة :اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻔﺘﺮة ﻗﺼﻴﺮة :ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻷﺳﻤﺎء اﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻔﺘﺮة ﻗﺼﻴﺮة :ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ xﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ :اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ وأﺳﻔﻞ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻔﺘﺮة ﻗﺼﻴﺮة :ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ) OKﻣﻮاﻓﻖ( xأﺳﻔﻞ :إﺷﺎرات ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ أﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ رﻗﻤﻴﺔ xﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر :إدﺧﺎل اﻷرﻗﺎم اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب اﻻﺗﺼﺎ
ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل xﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺳﻮى ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺎت وﺷﺎﺣﻦ LG ﻓﻘﻂ .ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ LGﻟﻴﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ. xﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ أو ﻗﺼﺮ داﺋﺮﺗﻬﺎ. ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل xﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻮﺻﻼت اﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ. 12 xﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪال اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪم ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻷداء اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب .ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ إﻋﺎدة ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﺌﺎت اﻟﻤﺮات ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺤﻴﻦ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺬي ﻳﻠﺰم اﺳﺘﺒﺪاﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ.
اﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎل اﻷﻃﻔﺎل xﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ داﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﻄﺎت اﻟﺘﺰود ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﻮد .وﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﻗﻮد أو اﻟﻤﻮاد اﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ. xﻳﺤﻔﻆ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎن آﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻴﺪا ً ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎول اﻷﻃﻔﺎل .ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ أﺟﺰاء ﺻﻐﻴﺮة ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺧﻄﺮ اﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻨﺎق ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎل ﻓﻜﻬﺎ. ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ اﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮة ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪوث ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ )ﺗﺸﻮش( ﻓﻲ اﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮات. ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻄﻮارئ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺎح ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻄﻮارئ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺎت اﻟﻬﻮاﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮﻳﺔ .ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ،ﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ أﺑﺪا ً أن ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻹﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻄﻮارئ .
ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل xﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺘﺮدد اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﺎرﺗﻚ ،ﻛﻤﺠﺴﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت )اﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ( وﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﻷﻣﺎن ﻣﺜﻼً. ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل xإذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﻴﺎرﺗﻚ ﻣﺰودة ﺑﻮﺳﺎﺋﺪ ﻫﻮاﺋﻴﺔ ،ﻓﻼ ﺗﻌﻖ ﻣﺴﺎرﻫﺎ ﺑﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ أو ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ .ﻓﻤﻦ اﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ أن ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬا ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎت ﺧﻄﻴﺮة ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ. 10 إذا ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ واﻧﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎرج ﻫﻨﺎ وﻫﻨﺎك ،رﺟﺎء ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺑﺄ ّن ﺣﺠﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﻣﻌﻘﻮل ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪرك ﻣﺎ ﻳﺪور ﺣﻮﻟﻚ.
xﻻ ﺗﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄداة ﺣﺎدة ،وإﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻒ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. xﻗﺪ ﺗﺆدي اﻟﻬﻮاﺗﻒ اﻟﺠﻮاﻟﺔ إﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺮض ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﺴﻤﻌﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪة ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻮش. xﻻ ﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺴﻮاﺋﻞ أو اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ. xﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ اﻟﺘﺪاﺧﻞ اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز واﻟﻤﺬﻳﺎع واﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. xاﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎت ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺣﺮص. اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻬﻮاﺗﻒ اﻟﺠﻮاﻟﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮض ﻟﻠﺘﺪاﺧﻞ )اﻟﺘﺸﻮش( ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ اﻷداء. xﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ اﻟﺠﻮال ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ دون اﻟﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ .
ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل اﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ وﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻪ 8 xاﺑﺪا ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺮن اﻟﻤﺎﻳﻜﺮوﻳﻒ ﻻن ذﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﺆدي اﻟﻰ اﻧﻔﺠﺎر اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ! xﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺳﻘﻮط اﻟﻮﺣﺪة. ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺳﻮى اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت واﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ واﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎت اﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪة ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮدﻳﻞ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻘﻂ .ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆدي اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أي أﻧﻮاع أﺧﺮى ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪة إﻟﻰ إﺑﻄﺎل أي ﺗﺼﺪﻳﻖ أو ﺿﻤﺎن ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .وﻗﺪ ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ذﻟﻚ ﺧﻄﺮا ً. xﻻ ﺗﻌﺮض ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰازات اﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴﺔ أو اﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎت.
ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺣﻮل اﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ )اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( وﻣﻌﺪل اﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎص اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ)(SAR ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻮدﻳﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺠﻮال KE970 ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺮوط ﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﺴﺎرﻳﺔ واﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎت اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ .وﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺸﺮوط ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت اﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎت اﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻬﺪف إﻟﻰ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻷﺷﺨﺎص ﺑﻐﺾ اﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ أﻋﻤﺎرﻫﻢ أوﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﺤﺘﻬﻢ. xوﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت اﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎت اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ وﺣﺪة ﻗﻴﺎس ﺗﻌﺮف ﺑﺎﺳﻢ )ﻣﻌﺪل اﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎص اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ( أو .
ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ • ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ اﻷﺣﻮال ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ اﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮات. • أ وﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ أﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﺸﺘﺮط ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ذﻟﻚ .ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل ،ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎت وإﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ذﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻌﺪات اﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ. • ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎت اﻟﺨﻠﻮﻳﺔ إﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻄﻮارئ .وﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ أﻻ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻄﻠﻘًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻹﺟﺮاء ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت. • ا ﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻘﻂ اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎت اﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻠﻒ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ.
ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻬﻨﺌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮاء اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺠﻮال KE970اﻟﺬي ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻷداء اﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪم وﺻﻐﺮ اﻟﺤﺠﻢ واﻟﻤﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ أﺣﺪث ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻠﺖ إﻟﻴﻪ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ اﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻت. ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻳﺤﺘﻮي دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮل اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .اﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮاءة ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻮاردة ﺑﻜﻞ دﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻟﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ أﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻷداء وﺗﺠﻨﺐ إﻟﺤﺎق اﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أو ﺳﻮء اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ .إﺟﺮاء أي ﻧﻮع ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮات أو اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼت ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮح ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆدي إﻟﻰ إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻀﻤﺎن اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻬﺬا اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ.
اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮى أدوات 83 اﻻﻋﺪادات اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ واﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮى ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ 4 اﻻﺿﺎءة اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﻄﻮع ﻗﻔﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ 93 اﺧﺘﺼﺎرات اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ 89 90 رﻗﻢ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﻤﻂ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﺮﻣﻮز ﻧﻤﻂ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻧﺺ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد اﺳﻢ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ 91 92 اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ 94 اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ 96 103 ﺣﻈﺮ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت وﺿﻊ اﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮة ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ إﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة 104 105 ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث وﺻﻠﺔ USB 98 اﻋﺪادات اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ 99 ﺗﺤ
ﻛﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﺻﺎدرة ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت واردة ﻣﺪة اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﺮض ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت 54 ﻗﺮاءة اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎ ت ﻧﻤﺎذج 55 اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪد ة اﻹﻋﺪادات اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ 65 56 67 68 ﺑﺮﻳﺪ إﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ 69 اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪد ة 57 رﻗﻢ اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ 70 ﺑﺮﻳﺪ إﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ 59 رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﺪﻓﻊ اﻟﻨﺺ 61 ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﻮارد ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﻼﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ 62 63 ﻣﺴﻮدات ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺼﺎدر 73 74 75 رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ
اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮى 5 6 ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل 7 ﻣﻴﺰات KE970 13 أﺟﺰاء اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ 17 ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺮﻣﻮز اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮى اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ 2 19 إدﺧﺎل ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMواﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ 21 ﺷﺤﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ 22 ﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ إدﺧﺎل ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة 23 إزاﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ 24 إﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ إدﺧﺎل ﻧﺺ 25 26 ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ واﻟﺨﻴﺎرات 31 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼل اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ 32 أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟ
KE970دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻋﺮ ﺑﻲ
